Home

Debugger User`s Manual

1. 13 58 WOUTPUT GUI File Output Window WOUTPUT dev_list OFF WOUTPUT is a GUI command that opens a file output window The output window displays the simulated output assignments for the specified device Multiple output windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 57 WOUTPUT Command woutput Open an output window for the current device woutput dvl off Close the output window for the device dv1 13 59 WREGISTER GUI Register Window WREGISTER dev_list win_num OFF 13 56 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WSOURCE GUI Source Window WREGISTER is a GUI command that opens a register window Multiple register windows may be opened to display and change separate blocks of registers at the same time Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 58 WREGISTER Command wregister Open a register window for the current device wregister win3 Open a register window with a window number of 3 for the current device wregister dvl off Close all register windows for the device dv1 13 60 WSESSION GUI Session Window WSESSION OFF The WSESSION command opens a Session window Only one Session window may be opened even for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs All session output from all targe
2. CT CT dspd_fill_memory initializes a block of memory on the specified DSP device device_index to the specified value count locations starting at address are filled with value Valid values for mem_space are e P_MEM program memory e X_MEM X data memory e Y_MEM Y data memory The return value is DSP_OK for success DSP_ERROR if the transaction fails See Example 14 12 Motorola Library Functions 14 17 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 12 dspd fill memory clear P memory on DSP device 1 include simcom h include driver h int devn int status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 init buffer to no value status dsp_fi11 memory devn X_MEM 0x01001 0x1441 0xffffff1 14 2 13 dspd_go Begin Execution on Target DSP Device include simcom h include driver h int dspd_go device index opcode operand int device_index Index of DSP device affected by command unsigned long opcode values to load into pipeline unsigned long operand before starting program execution dspd_go is called to start program execution on the target device device_index The target device s pipeline is loaded with the parameters opcode and operand and the device is forced to start
3. Breakpoint Resulting Action Halt Stops program execution when the breakpoint is encountered Note Displays the breakpoint expression in the Session window each time it is true Program execution continues The display in the Session window is not updated until program execution stops Show Displays the enabled register memory set Program execution continues Command Executes a Debugger command at the breakpoint Device execution commands such as TRACE or GO will not execute Increment n Increments the n counter by one 9 If the action specified is to execute a command under Command type the Debugger command 10 Click OK Motorola Getting Started 2 13 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints 2 6 2 To Clear a Software Breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Clear The Clear Breakpoints dialog box shown in Figure 2 7 displays a list of all the current breakpoints Clear Breakpoints x Breakpoint Number Figure 2 7 Clear Breakpoints Dialog Box 2 Select the breakpoint you want removed so that it is highlighted If you are clearing consecutive breakpoints you can click and drag to highlight more than one breakpoint Or hold down the CTRL key while clicking on breakpoints to select more than one 3 Click OK The breakpoints you selected are now deleted
4. Command Explanation wwatch ro Opena Watch window for the current device with the register rO displayed If the window already exists add rO to the list of watched items wwatch x 100 Open a Watch window for the current device with the memory location x 100 displayed If the window already exists add x 100 to the list of watched items wwatch r2 3 Open a Watch window for the current device with the expression r2 3 displayed If the window already exists add r2 3 to the list of watched items wwatch win2 ro Open a Watch window for the current device with a window number of 2 with the register r0 displayed If the window already exists add rO to the list of watched items wwatch off Close all Watch windows for the current device wwatch win3 off Close Watch window 3 for the current device wwatch 2 off Remove watch element 2 from first Watch window s list of watched elements 13 58 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WWATCH GUI Watch Window Example 13 62 WWATCH Command Command Explanation wwatch win4 2 off Remove watch element 2 from Watch window 4 s list of watched elements Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 59 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WWATCH GUI Watch Window 13 60 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual
5. Freescale Semiconductor Inc Starting Execution with Go 2 7 2 To Clear a Hardware Breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Clear The Clear Breakpoints dialog box shown in Figure 2 7 on page 2 14 displays a list of all the current breakpoints 2 Select the breakpoint you want removed so that it is highlighted If you are clearing consecutive breakpoints you can click and drag to highlight more than one breakpoint Or hold down the CTRL key while clicking on breakpoints to select more than one 3 Click OK The breakpoints you selected are now deleted Breakpoints will not be renumbered For example if you have set breakpoints 1 2 and 3 and then clear breakpoint 2 the remaining breakpoints will be numbered 1 and 3 Notice that breakpoints are indicated in the Assembly window and the Source window if applicable Enabled breakpoints appear in blue Disabled breakpoints appear in pink For more information see section 2 6 Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints section 3 10 Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints Chapter 10 Expressions and section 12 2 Display the Current Breakpoint The command reference line option for hardware breakpoints is covered in section 13 5 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints in Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference 2 8 Starting Execution with Go The most common way to initiate the execution of your program is wit
6. specifically Section 8 1 Moving Up and Down the Call Stack on page 8 1 Motorola Displayed Information 12 9 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Stack Window 12 10 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference The following chapter lists and describes the Debugger commands There are a total of sixty Debugger commands that can be performed from the command line The command line is a part of the Command Window These commands and their syntax are useful to know if you are using the command line or if you are writing a command macro The Debugger commands can be grouped into six categories memory register modification file T O execution control C Source Code Debug Commands miscellaneous tasks and windows controls used especially in writing command macros Memory Register Modification The following commands relate to modifying memory and registers These allow you to ASSEMBLE ASM DSP instructions CHANGE register or memory locations COPY a block of memory to a new location DISASSEMBLE code stored in the device memory DISPLAY registers and memory values DISPLAY the Debugger revision number or memory configuration FORCE the reset of the device WATCH certain variables and expressions Motorol
7. dsp_ldmem 0 newfn Load file into DSP device 0 14 2 49 dsp_realloc Reallocate Memory Block The routines dsp_alloc dsp_free_mem and dsp_realloc are replacements for the standard C functions malloc free and realloc They are used in much the same way as the standard functions for allocating space for structures buffers etc These functions are used in the debugger libraries and must also be used exclusively in the user debugger code Any attempt to use the standard routines will have unpredictable results include simcom h include protocom h void dsp_realloc mem blk nbytes char mem_blk Address of existing allocated block unsigned int nbytes Required size of memory block dsp_realloc changes the size of a memory block mem_b1k previously allocated with dsp_alloc to the specified size nbytes The address of the reallocated block may not be the same as the address of the original block The contents of the original block are preserved completely if the block size is increased or appended to the end of the new block if the block size is reduced If the requested block cannot be allocated the original block is unchanged See Example 14 49 14 46 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 49 dsp_realloc increase buffer size include
8. 14 10 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 5 dspd_cc_read_flag Read Command Converter Flag Word include cc h include simcom h include driver h int dspd_cc_read_flag device_index flag value int device_index Command Converter affected by command int flag Specify flag to read unsigned long value Location to receive flag value dspd_cc_read_flag reads flag word flag from Command Converter device_index storing the value obtained in the location pointed to by value Valid values for flag are DSP_CC_FLAGS DSP_CC_STATUS DSP_CC_XPTR DSP_CC_YPTR e DSP_CC_DEVICE_ADDRESS DSP_CC_CLOCK_RATE DSP_CC_DEVICE_COUNT DSP_CC_DEVICE_ACTIVE The function returns DSP_OK on success DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 5 Example 14 5 dspd_cc_read_flag Read Command Converter flag word include cc h include simcom h include driver h int status flag_value devn devn 0 status dspd_cc_read_flag devn DSP_CC_XPTR amp flag_value Motorola Library Functions 14 11 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 6 dspd_cc_read_memory Read from Command Converter Memory include simcom h
9. 5 Click OK Notice that the values in the Register window the Memory window and other Debugger windows are updated after each line or instruction is executed Because these values are updated at the speed of execution they will pass by very quickly In order to review the values scroll back through the Session window once execution has stopped It is often useful to log output from the Session window log Using trace from the command line is covered in section 13 42 TRACE Trace Through DSP Program on page 13 48 of Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference Motorola Controlling Execution 3 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Executing the Next Instruction 3 4 Executing the Next Instruction You can specify the number of instructions or lines that you would like the Debugger to execute before stopping Executing the next specific number of instructions is a quick way to control execution without having to set a breakpoint Executing instructions with next is similar to performing a step through instructions except that you can only specify the number of lines or instructions and not cycles Like stepping through instructions the display of the registers and memory blocks occurs only after the specified number of lines or instructions have been executed The important difference between using next as opposed to step is the way subroutines are handled If the
10. 8 Under Count specify how many times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before stopping For example if you set the count to 3 the breakpoint will be triggered the third time that the breakpoint is encountered Specifying a count will not affect real time execution 9 Under Expression you can type an expression The expression will be evaluated when the first and second condition you specified is satisfied If the expression is true the breakpoint will be triggered If the expression is false no action is taken and program execution continues 10 Under Action select what action is taken when the breakpoint is encountered Table 2 2 Hardware Breakpoint Actions Breakpoint Resulting Action Halt Stops program execution when the breakpoint is encountered Note Displays the breakpoint expression in the Session window each time it is true Program execution continues The display in the Session window is not updated until program execution stops Show Displays the enabled register memory set Program execution continues Command Executes a Debugger command at the breakpoint Device execution commands such as TRACE or GO will not execute Increment n Increments the n counter by one 11 If the action specified is to execute a command under Command type the Debugger command 12 Click OK Motorola Getting Started 2 17 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com
11. The Next button executes the next instruction or line See Figure 11 4 yu Breall 2 p 000198 h dev b pr 01906 cyrc 24 xe HHHHHHHHHHHH y HHHHHHHHHHHH a aqgagaganppnnn b aappopppppppad xIeSHHMHHM xH SHHHHHH SHAH 11 SH yieSHHMHHH yHeSHHHHHH A n s a2 qd ai bbDDDD 39 aqaada r5 DDDDAA ns a ee SHH AAA NH HHHHHH ASS tm ra 5Dbbbqq n a Figure 11 4 Next Button If the next instruction to be executed calls a subroutine or begins execution of a function all the instructions of the subroutine or function are executed before stopping The enabled registers memory and other updated values are then displayed In order to recognize functions the symbolic debug information for the program code must be loaded To execute the next instruction from the toolbar 1 Make sure that program execution is halted and that the Source window is not open 2 Click on the Next button on the toolbar The Debugger will execute the next assembly instruction To execute the next line from the toolbar 1 Make sure that program execution is halted and that the Source window is open If the Source window is not open the Debugger will automatically execute the next instruction in the Assembly window rather than then next line in the Source window 2 Click on the Next button on the toolbar The Debugger will execute the next executable line of code in the Source window Comments lines in the source code are ignored N
12. The TIMEOUT argument is used to change the host timeout value In order for the user interface to avoid becoming hung up it limits the time it will wait for the Command Converter to respond If the Command Converter does not respond within this limit an error message will be displayed The default value of the timeout is 1 second Example 13 24 HOST Command host Display the current Host Interface Card address and timeout count being used host timeout 3 Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 31 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc INPUT Assign Input File Change the host timeout to 3 seconds host io 200 Change the PC Host Interface address to 200 Note Changing the Host Interface address should be done only after changing JG1 of the IBM PC Interface Card otherwise the target DSP address will not respond to the user interface commands 13 27 INPUT Assign Input File INPUT dev_list file number OFF address TERM filename rd rf rh ru The INPUT command opens an input file which will pass data to a target device The Debugger begins the transfer of data when the program in the device memory executes a DEBUG instruction residing at a specific address There is no limit on the number of input files that can be open The optional parameter dev_list represents the device or list of devices on which the command will be performed The optional
13. char path_name Directory pathname char base_name Base filename to be appended to path_name char suffix Suffix string to be appended to base_name char new_name Pointer to return buffer for constructed pathname dsp_load constructs a fully specified path and filename from the user provided path_name base_name and suffix The constructed filename is returned in new_name If base_name begins with a pathname separator or with a device designator path_name will not be prefixed to base_name If base_name already ends with and some filename extension the string in suffix will not be appended See Example 14 48 Motorola Library Functions 14 45 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 48 dsp_load Load file filter2 lod from the current working directory for device O include simcom h include protocom h include simdev h extern struct dev_const dv_const emulator device structures char newfn 80 dsp_new 0 56002 Create new DSP structure Create file name from Path specified in device structure dv_const sv 0 gt pathwork created by path command Base file name filter2 Filename suffix lod Note the is not explicitly specified dsp_path dv_const sv 0 gt pathwork filter2 lod newfn
14. Array for words of assembled code char error_ptr Will point to message if an error occurs dspt_masm_xxxxx invokes the single line assembler to assemble a DSP mnemonic It returns one of the following integer codes e 1 An error occurred The user supplied error pointer error_ptr will point to a message that explains the error e 0 The line mnemonic provided was a comment e 1 The mnemonic assembled correctly and required 1 word of code The code will be in the ops 0 location e 2 The mnemonic assembled correctly and required 2 words of code The first word will be placed in ops 0 the second in ops 1 La e 3 The mnemonic assembled correctly and required 3 words of code The first word will be placed in ops 0 the second in ops 1 the third in ops 2 Note The xxxxx in the function name should be replaced by a device family number It should be 56k for the 56000 family devices 56n00 for the 56n00 family devices and 96k for the 96000 family devices See Example 14 23 Example 14 23 dspt_masm_xxxxx Assemble the instruction move r0 r1 include proto56k h unsigned long opcodes 3 char error_ptr int retval retval dspt_masm_56k move r0 r1 gopcodes 0 8error_ptr Motorola Library Functions 14 27 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 24 dspt_unasm_xxxxx Disassem
15. Motorola Controlling Execution 3 17 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Hardware Breakpoints Freescale Semiconductor Inc satisfied followed by the Second Condition Only indicates that only the first condition must be met to trigger the breakpoint 6 Under Second Condition specify the conditions for the second condition This will only apply if you have indicated so under Option in step 5 7 Under Breakpoint Number select the number you want to assign to this breakpoint The default number shown is the next available number Breakpoint numbers do not have to be consecutive they can be assigned arbitrarily For example it may be convenient to allocate breakpoints so that one function is assigned breakpoints to 10 another uses 11 to 20 and so on 8 Under Count specify how many times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before stopping For example if you set the count to 3 the breakpoint will be triggered the third time that the breakpoint is encountered Specifying a count will not affect real time execution 9 Under Expression you can type an expression The expression will be evaluated when the first and second condition you specified is satisfied If the expression is true the breakpoint will be triggered If the expression is false no action is taken and program execution continues 10 Under Action select what action is taken when the breakpoint is encountered Table 3 4 list
16. dsp_cc_rmem devn read_memtyp read_address amp read_store Motorola Library Functions 14 33 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 32 dsp_cc_rmem_b1k Read Command Converter Memory Block include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int dsp_cc_rmem_blk device mtype address count value int device Command Converter affected by command enum memory_map mtype Memory space to read unsigned long address Address of location to read unsigned long count number of locations to read unsigned long value Target location for read value dsp_cc_rmem_b1k reads count locations from the target Command Converter device memory space mtype address address and stores the values in the buffer pointed to by value Valid values for mtype are DSP_CC_YMEM DSP_CC_XMEM and DSP_CC_PMEM The return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 32 Example 14 32 dsp _cc_rmem b1k Read memory block from Command Converter memory include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int devn status enum memory_map read _memtyp memory space to read unsigned long read_address address of first location to read read_length number of locations to read read_store 102
17. on chip emulation module that allows the development tools to have identical features Using the concept of a common serial debug port Motorola has developed one set of tools which allows you to communicate with any Motorola DSP architecture through a command converter In some Motorola DSPs this module uses a dedicated OnCE serial port to access the internal module In other Motorola DSPs the internal OnCE module is addressed by using the IEEE Joint Test Action Group Motorola Introduction 1 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc JTAG 4 wire Test Access Port TAP Boundary Scan Architecture protocol Motorola s DSP software tools can use either the direct OnCE serial port or the JTAG serial port The ADS provides a tool for designing debugging and evaluating DSP based systems It consists of three hardware circuit boards and two software programs The hardware circuit boards are the host bus interface command converter and the ADM The two software programs are the ADS user interface program which is executed on the host computer and the Command Converter monitor program The ADM card has a 14 pin connector which provides an access point for the command converter s JTAG OnCE interface You can use the ADS as an emulator to debug the hardware or software for a defined target system to do so you must provide an access point on the target hardware for a 14 pin JTAG OnCE in
18. want to use hardware breakpoints judiciously In effect only one hardware breakpoint can be enabled at any time Motorola Getting Started 2 15 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints 2 7 1 To Set a Hardware Breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Set Hardware The dialog box in Figure 2 8 appears Set Breakpoint Ed Type First Condition Action Type Access Address Qualifier z Halt Note ldma C Read Equal El Cite C Not Equal C Show Read Write Greater Than Command Memory Space f Execute Piece then C Increment CNT1 p y Increment CNT2 C Increment CNT3 Address C Increment CNT 4 Option And C Or Then Command C Only Second Condition po Access Address Qualifier Breakpoint Number C Read Equal Expression C Write C Not Equal 1 aj Zi C Read write Greater Than Execute C Less Than Count 1 al Address Pr Cancel Figure 2 8 Setting a Hardware Breakpoint 2 Under Type select the type of hardware breakpoint to set Breakpoint types are device specific See Table 2 2 for an explanation of each type of breakpoint 3 Under Memory Space select the memory space in which the breakpoint is to be set 4 Under First Condition specify the conditions under which the breakpoint occurs Under Access
19. 0 n IR n Specifies the length of the instruction register for unsupported devices 2 n The defaults for the above parameters are as follows CCn defaults to the device number DVn and all other parameters default to zero Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 23 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc DISASSEMBLE Single Line Disassembler Example 13 14 DEVICE Command Command Explanation device Display all activated target DSP addresses and device types and lists all supported family members device dv0 2 on Activate target DSP address 0 target DSP address 1 and target DSP address 2 device dv0 3 off Deactivate target DSP address 0 and target DSP address 3 device dv2 Select target DSP address 2 as the default target DSP for command entry device dvl x Deactivate target DSP address 1 and discard all associated data structures If this was the selected device select another device dv12 cc3 pos2 56301 Specifies that device DV12 refers to a DSP56301 which is controlled by Command Converter 3 occupying the third 0 1 2 position in the chain TMSO is used by default device cc3 tms0 posili ir 3 The device on Command Converter 3 TMS chain 0 position 1 is not to be used in this development session It has an instruction register 3 bits wide Note that no device number may be specified
20. 10 1 10 2 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 13 1 xii Freescale Semiconductor Inc Changing the Radix of Input vpjsnaraa rar Shei ai st hanes 7 5 Displaying a Register or Memory Locations oooooccoooooooc o 7 6 Saving Window Status on Edad iia Lage es 7 8 Moving Up the Call Stadk cono la a A 8 1 Moving Down the Call Stack 4 0056 e004 oe we ew a end dee a ae alas 8 2 Displaying the Call Stark cast onrawag unk aaa edian 8 3 Monitoring C Function Calls serca pease savaged x 8 4 Redirecting the I O SI AAA AS a ees 8 6 Displaying the Type of a C Variable or Expression 8 7 Evaluating an Expression S 1s 555 2 4ig onse rss bane we ee ins 10 2 Displaying a Value in a Watch Listin AA 10 10 COMPU BOR ud DI A A TDS NR 11 2 Stop Buttoni AE DEA 11 2 Step Button seat e toa eet apes 11 3 Next Butte esci rt DIRA RS de air 11 4 Finish BUOM iess AAA AR 11 5 Device BUON aa m br ee A es 11 6 Repeal DUO sessy i eE EE EE dhe E AAA 11 7 R set BUON dare a A AS it 11 8 Break POMS siawaes AAA Aia 12 2 Command Wind Ow eat Ss sta ls et Sth no aa Ge eo load 12 3 SESSION IIA Wi Leek as a ha Che Rid ated eens 12 5 Pausing Output to the Session Window 0 000 e cece 12 6 Assembly WIN Word Se piace aaa a em suet 12 7 SOULCE WiNdOW seu A ae PA he Pe Mica a 12 8 ADS Debugger Command Window 0 0 00 cece eee 13 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More
21. Abbreviation Description dev_type Device type expression Any arithmetic expression valid for the DSP Assembler Register names can also be used in the expression c_ expression Any expression valid in the current C program A c_expression must be enclosed in curly braces file Any valid filename including relative and absolute paths Loradix RD decimal RF float or fractional RH hexadecimal RU unsigned location Integer expression It will be mapped into the device address range For ex ample 1 translates to the maximum address mode Device operating mode in the form Mn pathname Any valid pathname periph Valid peripheral names are displayed by the Debugger help periph command pin Valid pin names are displayed by the Debugger help pin command A pin name may optionally be preceded by pin in order to resolve conflicts that may exist between pin and register names or constants pin_block pin pin port Valid port names are displayed by the Debuggerr help port command reg Valid register names are displayed by the Debugger display all command A register name may optionally be preceded by reg in order to resolve con flicts that may exist between register and pin names or constants reg_block reg reg reg_group periph all topic Help topic keywords used with the HELP command For more information see Section 1 4 Entering Commands on page 1 7 Section 13 2 Command Syntax Motorola Debugger C
22. C Source Code Debug Commands The following commands relate to debugging C source code These include 13 2 WHERE to display the C function call stack UP DOWN and FRAME are used to traverse the call stack REDIRECT is used to redirect data from stdin stdout stderr to files STREAMS enable the io streams and TYPE displays the data type of a variable function or C expression Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Miscellaneous Tasks The following commands include miscellaneous tasks DEVICE specifies a new device and its device type EVALUATE evaluates expressions in five different radices HELP displays device specific information in the Session window PATH defines the working directory and alternate directories QUIT ends a debugging session HOST changes the attributes of the Host Interface Card RADIX specifies the default number base hex decimal etc used during expression evaluation and data entry or data display SYSTEM executes an operating system command in two modes WAIT specifies a number of seconds to pause execution before proceeding to the next instruction LIST displays a specified source file when symbolic debug is in effect VIEW allows selection of the Debugger display mode Source Assembly or Register UNLOCK provides password enabling of unannounced device types Windows Controls The
23. COFF supports user defined sections and contains extensive information for symbolic software testing and debugging The DSP COFF format has been altered to support multiple memory spaces and normalized to promote transportability of object files among host processors For more information about Motorola s implementation of COFF please refer to the Motorola Suite56 DSP Assembler Reference Manual For a more general discussion of COFF see Gintaras R Gircys book Understanding and Using COFF O Reilly amp Associates 1988 ISBN 0 937175 31 5 4 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 5 Managing Memory and Registers This chapter discusses changing and displaying both memory and register values You will also find information concerning dissasembling code stored in memory and the use of a watch list 5 1 Resetting the Device Registers You can reset the device registers or the entire system at any time To reset the device registers 1 From the Execute menu choose Reset then select Device The device registers and peripherals are now reset to the initialized state of the device To reset the system 1 From the Execute menu choose Reset then select System This resets the command converter and then resets the target devices putting the target system into Debug mode To reset the registers from the command li
24. Figure 2 2 appears Load Memory COFF Ed Load Memory C Debug Symbols Memory and Symbols File Name Cancel Apply Figure 2 2 Loading a COFF cld File 2 Under Load select Memory Debug Symbols or both The Debugger will process the symbol and line number information contained in a COFF format object file cld file only if the file was compiled or assembled with debugging enabled In the Motorola DSP Assembler this is represented by the g option If symbol information has been loaded the evaluator will accept symbol names or source file line numbers and translate them into an associated memory address Under Filename specify the filename of the object file to load or click on the File button to browse for the file Click OK If the cld file is not found in the selected directory the Debugger will try to load the file from the working directory If the file does not exist in the working directory the Debugger will try to load the file from the alternate directories An error message is displayed if the file is not found in any of these directories Motorola Getting Started 2 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Loading Object Files To load an OMF lod file 1 From the File menu choose Load then select Memory OMF 2 Specify the filename in the dialog box It is not necessary to type the extension with the filename
25. In the Assembly window and Source window enabled breakpoints appear in blue Disabled breakpoints appear in pink For information about setting breakpoints from the command line see section 13 5 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints on page 13 10 See section 3 6 Software Breakpoints and section 3 8 Hardware Breakpoints for more information about the uses of breaktpoints in debugging with the SuiteS6 Debugger 3 22 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Using Expressions in Breakpoints 3 11 Using Expressions in Breakpoints It is possible to use expressions in conjunction with both software breakpoints and hardware breakpoints When a breakpoint is reached the expression is evaluated If the expression is true the action indicated by the breakpoint is taken If the expression is false no action is taken and program execution continues A valid expression can consist of a combination of symbols constants operators and parentheses Expressions follow the conventional rules of algebra and Boolean arithmetic and might contain any combination of integers floating point numbers memory space symbols or register symbols Table 3 11 lists the operators that can be used in the breakpoint expression Table 3 11 List of Operators Syntax Description lt less than amp amp logical and
26. Setting Up and Modifying a Watch list A C expression which refers to C variables can only be evaluated in the context in which the watch is established That is the expression is only valid when all the variables used in the expression are in scope So if one or more of the variables in an expression goes out of scope either because a function call or return from a function the value is replaced with the message Expression out of scope When all elements of the expression are back in scope the value is again displayed An expression that has gone out of scope because of a function call can be evaluated and displayed by selecting the stack frame for the evaluation context The stack frame assignment remains in effect only until the next instruction is executed An expression that is out of scope because of an exit from a function cannot be evaluated until the function is called again as its variables no longer exists To set a watch list from the command line see Section 13 49 WATCH Set Modify View or Clear Watch Item on page 13 52 Motorola Expressions 10 11 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting Up and Modifying a Watch list 10 12 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 11 Debugger Toolbar You can use the toolbar to control some program exe
27. cforce u Force the default Command Converter into the User mode 13 9 CGO Execute OnCE Sequence CGO dev_list from address The CGO command allows the user to execute OnCE command sequences in the DSP56002 controller s Y memory This command is useful for debugging user defined OnCE serial command sequences which will be used in a target system A sequence memory pointer resides in the DSP56002 controller s internal X memory at address 2 This pointer is used as the start location and may be changed using the CCHANGE command Example 13 5 CGO Command cgo Execute the OnCE sequence of the default Command Converter starting at the current address in the Command Converter PTR cgo 10 Change the Command Converter PTR to hex 10 and execute the OnCE sequence of the default Command Converter starting at that address 13 10 CLOAD Load OnCE Command Sequence CLOAD dev_list filename The CLOAD command is used for loading a user defined OnCE serial command sequence into the Command Converter internal Y memory The file must be in DSP object module format OMF and have a lod suffix name The CLOAD command allows you to write a OnCE command sequence using the Command Converter monitor program OnCE sequence format Example 13 6 CLOAD Command cload onceseq lod Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 17 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc CSAVE S
28. dsp_unlock device_type password Unlock password protected device type dsp_wmem devn map addr val Write DSP memory map addr with val dsp_wmem blk devn map addr count value Write DSP Memory Block dsp _ wreg devn periphn regn regval Write DSP peripheral register with regval 14 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Fr eescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 1 2 7 User Interface Routines Table 14 7 lists user interface routines Table 14 7 sim User Interface Routines Routine Description sim docmd devn command_string Perform emulator command on DSP device sim_gmcmd devn command_string Get Command String from Macro File sim _ gtcmd devn command_string Get Command String from Terminal 14 2 Library Function Descriptions The following sections defines and describes each library function 14 2 1 ads_cache_registers Cache OnCE and Core Registers include simcom h inc int int Lude protocom h rs device_index ads_cache_regist device devic affected by command ads_cache_registers caches all OnCE and core registers on the target device device_index to ensure the integrity of values returned by dsp_rreg This routine must always be called before calling dsp_rreg each time the de
29. form of the command Each time the command is issued the specified pathname or comma separated list of pathnames is added to the current list When searching for files the ADS user interface program will search first using the default pathname specified for the current device then in each of the alternate source pathnames in the order that they were specified Example 13 33 PATH Command Command Explanation path Display the path for the current default target DSP address path dv1 4 Define a path to the root directory for target DSP addresses 1 2 3 and 4 All subsequent commands with filename arguments will have this path string preceded to the filename when making an operating system call path test Add pathname test to the list of alternate source pathnames path test help Add pathnames test and help to the list of alternate source pathnames path Clear the list of alternate source pathnames 13 35 QUIT Quit Debugger Session QUIT E enable D disable The QUIT command passes control back to the operating system and closes all logging files assignment files and macro files currently open Use the SYSTEM command to exit the ADS program temporarily QUIT enable and QUIT disable control the action taken by the ADS if an error occurs during the execution of a macro command QUIT enable specifies that the macro command is aborted
30. it refreshes the entire screen from the device s display buffer Motorola Library Functions 14 69 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Reserved Function Names 14 6 Reserved Function Names The public function names used in the emulator all begin with the prefixes dsp_ ads_ or sim_ Functions which begin with sim_ are only available when a display version of the emulator is created Functions which begin with dsp_ and ads_ are available to both display and non display versions The screen management functions all begin with simw_ In general functions which begin with dsp_ or sim_are higher level functions available for direct reference from the user s code those beginning with dspd_ dspl_ or siml_ are meant only for internal use by the emulator The higher level functions and the screen management functions are documented in Section 14 2 Library Function Descriptions and Section 14 3 Emulator Screen Management Functions The public functions are listed in the file named global sym which is included with the distribution 14 7 Emulator Global Variables In order to reduce conflicts with user variable names the emulator global variables have been grouped together into several large structures In general the structure names beginning with s are used defined in simusr h and are only used in the display version of the emulator while those beginning with d are defined
31. sequences A single data value can be repeated by adding the following syntax after a data item count Enclosing several data items in parentheses indicates that the data items are to be treated as a group The entire group can then be repeated by placing count immediately following the closing parenthesis The parentheses can be nested A closing parenthesis without a following repeat count will cause the data sequence within the parentheses to repeat forever Motorola Input and Output Files 6 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc How are I O files formatted Example 6 1 Repeating Data Values LFF 20 Repeats the data item 1 FF twenty times CC354 CC333 C7000 Repeats the data sequence CC354 CC333 C7000 forever 1 5 O 5 Repeats the data sequence 1 1 1 1 100000 forever 6 1 2 Comments Any information following a semicolon up to the end of line is considered to be a user comment and is not interpreted as input data or timing Example 6 2 User Comment FFC 333 972 next three p memory data words The first three data values are applied to the device The information following the semicolon is a user comment 6 1 3 Memory Data When assigned to a memory location the input file data value supplies the value that is read when the Debugger references that memory location The least significant memory bit maps to the least significant bit of the data valu
32. simw_winit This function initializes any screen or keyboard parameters that are required for the emulator terminal I O environment It is called whenever the emulator is entered from the operating system level which includes the initial emulator entry and re entry following the system command 14 3 15 simw_wscr Write String and Perform Logging simw_wscr text command_flag char text Text string to write to screen int command_flag Flag l string is a command 0 not a command This function outputs the string text to the terminal above the command line after scrolling the display up one line It also takes care of writing the text string to the proper log files specified by the emulator log s or log c commands depending on flag 14 4 Non Display Emulator The emulator package contains object libraries which support both display and non display versions of the emulator The library nwads contains functions available to the non display version of the emulator The library wwads contains functions that may only be used in a display version of the emulator For each device type there are also display and non display device specific libraries named wwxxxxx and nwxxxxx where the xxxxx is the device number The source code contained in anwdsp c can be linked with the nwxxxxx and nwsim libraries to create a non display version of the emulator Elimination of the user interface functions cuts the code size of the emulator al
33. subroutine For example let s suppose that you indicate to the Debugger to execute the next five instructions Let s further suppose that the third instruction is a JSR a jump to a subroutine and that the subroutine contains fourteen instructions Execution will occur in the following manner e the first two instructions are executed e the third instruction a JSR calls a subroutine e the next two instructions of the subroutine are executed the rest of the subroutine will not be executed because a total of five instructions have now been stepped through If by stepping through a subroutine as in the above example the end of the subroutine is not reached you can indicate to the Debugger that it should allow the current function to finish Motorola Controlling Execution 3 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Trace the Execution of Instructions 3 2 1 To Step Through Program Instructions 1 From the Execute menu choose Step The dialog box in Figure 3 2 appears Device Count 1 aj Increment Lines Dy4 z Cancel Apply Figure 3 2 Step Through Program Instructions C Instructions 2 Under Device select the device on which you are debugging 3 Under Increment select whether to step by lines or instructions You can only specify lines if the object code includes debugging information 4 Under Count specify t
34. 12 6 13 38 13 39 13 57 set 7 4 sim_gmcmd 14 59 sim_gtcmd 14 60 simw_ceol 14 61 simw_ctrlbr 14 61 simw_cursor 14 62 simw_endwin 14 62 simw_getch 14 62 simw_gkey 14 62 simw_putc 14 62 simw_puts 14 63 simw_redo 14 63 simw_redraw 14 63 simw_refresh 14 63 simw_scrnest 14 63 simw_unnest 14 64 simw_winit 14 64 Index 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc simw_wscr 14 64 wsession 13 57 source 8 1 12 8 13 51 13 57 13 58 wsource 13 57 source code 8 1 12 8 13 57 wstack 13 58 stack 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 12 9 13 29 13 51 13 54 wwads 14 64 13 55 13 58 wwatch 13 58 13 59 start 2 19 2 20 3 2 3 3 13 30 start execution 14 41 14 42 14 53 state file 7 7 13 45 stderr 13 44 13 45 stdin 13 44 13 45 stdout 13 45 step 3 3 3 4 3 6 11 3 13 39 13 46 13 47 13 49 stop 3 26 11 2 stop execution 14 54 stream 8 5 8 6 8 7 13 44 13 45 13 47 streams 8 5 8 6 8 7 13 44 13 45 13 47 subroutine 13 28 13 39 symbols 10 3 system 13 47 13 48 T TMS 7 3 toolbar 11 1 11 3 11 4 11 6 trace 3 5 13 46 13 48 13 49 type 8 7 13 49 13 50 U unlock 13 50 unsigned 13 44 until 3 8 13 50 up 8 1 13 51 V variable 8 7 view 13 51 13 55 W wait 3 24 13 51 13 52 watch 2 10 2 11 5 9 10 10 10 11 13 52 13 53 13 58 13 59 wcalls 13 54 wcommand 13 54 where 13 54 13 55 window 7 8 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 13 53
35. 4 Setting Up the Display Environment 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 2 7 23 Asma W al CU List coscg ES ed 2 10 2 6 Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints 20 0020 eee eee 2 11 2 7 Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints 20000 000 2 15 2 8 Staring Execution With CO hoe ate A eed Skee tee 2 18 Chapter 3 Controlling Execution 3 1 Starting Execution With GO tras dades 3 1 3 2 Step Through Iistructons a AS we ae Ss Rae 3 3 3 3 Trace the Execution of Instructions 2 2 06 60 cece ie awe do 3 4 34 Executing the Next Instruction rta deeb es faded 3 6 3 5 Providing an Until Condition 00 0 00 6 eteiny ae eee AES ES Ry ALAS 3 8 3 6 Software Break points id waded A A wees tak A 3 9 3 7 Types of Software Breakpoimts s 2 543 5425p 5a Si batendeeres Sib ebutas 3 12 33 Hardware Break points tl ay aera ee BS A eR eS eR OS 3 16 3 9 Types of Hardware Breakpoints id Socks Bod Oth SSeS oe Ee SSS 3 20 3 10 Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints 0 0 0 0 0c eee ee eee 3 22 3 11 Using Expressions in Breakpoints 0 4 ca see ewe SA Dy ea as 3 23 3 12 Pausing Execution with Walla eh hes teh ae nbck 3 24 3 13 Allowing the Current Function to Finish 4 6 3 44 044 60 seis baad ates ees 3 25 3 14 Stopping Program Execution Ieee RR eS 3 26 Motorola iii For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8
36. 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 7 1 Es 1 3 7 4 7 5 Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 4 Object Files and Data Files Displaying the Current Path Lat is A Mewes iN eh hha Neches 4 To Set the Working Directory Path A WEY RASS 4 2 Loading Object Biles ro a dad kab es uae bynes ead AAA eyed 4 4 saying Object Blest gute bets hh alte gates Me outa do ATA aL 4 4 5 Object Module Corman 4 7 Common Object File Format condi nicas DAI OSS ee Rta OES Ai 4 8 Chapter 5 Managing Memory and Registers Resetting the Device Registers Veja dre ra 5 1 Displaying Register Values c lt wic dine 2 eS eee bi 5 2 Changing Register Values cerdas adidas Sawn aah Seb ede 5 3 Displaying Memory Valles stas dr Peewee Savas epee 5 4 Changing Memory Y aus id Sie A A WRI SES 5 6 Copying Meno saeara Gets eet de el eds ale 5 7 Disassembling Code Stored in Memory 0 00 e eee eee eens 5 8 Using a W atch Lista si A 5 9 Chapter 6 Input and Output Files How are O files formatted wesho te ke2 A AAA 6 1 AS grin an dnpur Fl ss cote os 6 4 Examples of How to Assign an Input File 0 0 2 0 eee eee eee 6 7 Assigning an Output Ple ti Math hou ag the Mand we MES eho Mae Ne 6 11 Examples of How to Assign an Output File oo oooooomooo 6 13 Chapter 7 Debugger and Device Configurations To Set the Configuration of a Device iaa ai 7 2 Setting the Dela ul DEVICE se Rue ROEM ia AG ae 7 4 Changing the Radeon Kd aeea eae beh are ES ee Ste
37. ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 3 Controlling Execution This chapter includes a description of various functions necessary to control the execution of a program that you are debugging The following functions can be used in the execution of the program go step trace next until break wait finish stop 3 1 Starting Execution with Go The most common way to initiate the execution of your program is with go When you indicate go to the Debugger it fetches decodes and executes instructions in the exact manner as a device would if you were debugging an actual device The go command executes the program until one of the following occurs e abreakpoint is reached e you indicate stop e ora debug instruction is encountered Motorola Controlling Execution 3 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Starting Execution with Go 3 1 1 To Start Executing Instructions with Go 3 2 1 From the Execute menu choose GO The Go dialog box in Figure 3 1 appears Device From fale Go From 1 Address D C Reset Break Number Address Figure 3 1 Executing Instructions with Go Under Go From choose Address or Reset If you choose Reset the Debugger simulates the reset sequence in the processor The inst
38. Breakpoints will not be renumbered For example if you have set breakpoints 1 2 and 3 and then clear breakpoint 2 the remaining breakpoints will be numbered 1 and 3 Notice that breakpoints are indicated in the Assembly window and the Source window if applicable Enabled breakpoints appear in blue Disabled breakpoints appear in pink For more information see section 2 7 Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints section 3 10 Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints on page 3 22 Chapter 10 Expressions section 12 2 Display the Current Breakpoint on page 12 2 and section 13 5 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints on page 13 10 in Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference 2 14 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints 2 7 Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints Hardware breakpoints are used to specify that a particular action be taken whenever a certain condition is met In this way hardware breakpoints are very similar to software breakpoints However there are some differences Hardware breakpoints e use the OnCE circuitry on the device e can break on the execution of an instruction e can be set in ROM or RAM e can be set to detect an access of data memory Although hardware breakpoints are more flexible than software breakpoints you will
39. DSP address break dv2 off Disable currently enabled breakpoints for target DSP address 2 break off 2 Disable breakpoint number 2 of the current default target address Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 13 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints Table 13 3 Examples of BREAK on DSP devices with OnCE or JTAG OnCE Ports Command Explanation break dv2 p 100 Halt DSP program execution of target DSP address 2 and display enabled registers and memory when the DSP instruction at program address 100 hex is reached This is a hardware breakpoint which will work with OnCE and JTAG OnCE based DSPs break p 30 s Display enabled registers and memory of the current default target DSP address and continue program execution when the DSP instruction at program address 30 hex is reached This is a hardware breakpoint which will work with OnCE and JTAG OnCE based DSPs break dv3 p 200 t r0 gt r1 If the value of RO is greater than R1 in target DSP address 3 h when its DSP instruction at its program counter 200 hex is reached halt target DSP address 3 To evaluate whether RO is greater than R1 the host computer will set a hardware breakpoint at address 200 and will interrogate the target DSP every time a breakpoint occurs at that address This is a hardware breakpoint which will work with OnCE and JTAG OnCE bas
40. DSP call the host software intercepts the call and does the fopen on the host side Example 13 39 STREAMS Command streams e Enable handling of C input output All input output calls done in a C program running on the DSP will be handled by the host software e g fopen fwrite printf etc streams d Disable handling of C input output 13 41 SYSTEM Execute Operating System Commands SYSTEM C continue immediately system_command argument_list The SYSTEM command allows operating system commands to be executed The operating system commands may be executed as subprocesses of the ADS interface program or may be executed independently by temporarily exiting the ADS interface program Invoking this command with no arguments will cause the ADS Interface Program to pass control to the Operating system but stay resident To re enter the ADS Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 47 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc TRACE Trace Through DSP Program Interface Program the EXIT command must be invoked from the operating system command line Operating System commands invoked from within the ADS Interface program will not be logged to the screen buffer for review When a SYSTEM command is specified on the system command line the user is prompted to Hit return to continue before control returns to the ADS This allows the user to inspect the command out
41. DSP peripheral number int reg_num DSP register number unsigned long reg_val Value to be written to register dsp_wreg writes a selected register in the a DSP device Use the emulator help reg command to obtain a list of the valid periph_num and reg_num values and reg_val size for each register Also the function dsp_findreg can be used to obtain the peripheral and register number by using the register name as a key If a register requires more than one word to represent the data value the least significant word should be at reg_val with more significant words at reg_val 1 etc See Example 14 63 Motorola Library Functions 14 57 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 63 dsp_wreg Write value 100 to pe register in device 0 Use dsp_findreg to determine device and register numbers for pc include simcom h include protocom h int devn int periph_num reg_num unsigned long regval devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 regval 100L if dsp _findreg devn pc amp periph_num amp reg_num dsp_wreg devn periph_num reg_num amp regval 14 2 64 sim _docmd Execute Emulator User Interface Command include simcom h include protocom h sim_docmd device_index command_string int device_index
42. Displays x memory location hexadecimal 55 of the current default target DSP address and prompt the user for a new value Subsequent or previous memory locations may be examined and changed using the up arrow key for the previous address and down arrow for the next address change dv3 pc Display the current value of the program counter on target DSP address 3 and prompt the user for a new value Subsequent or previous register values may be examined and changed using the up arrow key for the previous address and down arrow for the next address change p 20 123456 Change the current default target DSP address s p memory address hexadecimal 20 to hexadecimal 123456 change r0 r7 O Change the current default target DSP address s registers rO to 7 to 0 p memory addresses 30 hex to 300 hex to 0 x memory ys Sff paran nee TOU EEES address fffe hex to 55 hex and the program counter to 100 55 pc 100 decimal change dv1 3 5 r0 r7 O Change target DSP addresses 1 3 and 5 registers rO to r7 to 0 p 1000 2000 0 and their program memory addresses 1000 hex to 2000 hex to a value of 0 change xdat xdat 5 35 Change memory block beginning at the address corresponding to symbolic label xdat and ending at xdat 5 to decimal value 35 13 15 COPY Copy a Memory Block COPY from dev_ num address _block to address The COPY command allows you to copy memory blocks from one location to another The source and d
43. Equal C Show Read Write C Greater Than Command Memory Space C Execute Pis Then C Increment CNT1 p y Increment CNT2 C Increment CNT3 Address C Increment CNT4 Option J And C Or f Then Command C Only Second Condition Poo Access Address Qualifier Breakpoint Number C Read Equal Expression C Write C Not Equal 1 vi C Read Write C Greater Than Execute Less Than Count 1 aj Address sE Tr Cancel Figure 3 7 Setting a Hardware Breakpoint 2 Under Type select the type of hardware breakpoint to set Breakpoint types are device specific See Table 3 4 for an explanation of each type of breakpoint 3 Under Memory Space select the memory space in which the breakpoint is to be set 4 Under First Condition specify the conditions under which the breakpoint occurs Under Access indicate what kind of access should be detected by the breakpoint For example if you want the breakpoint to detect when a memory location is read but not written to select Read If you want either a read or a write to be detected chose Read Write etc Under Address Qualifier indicate the qualifier for the address location Under Address type the address that the breakpoint references 5 Under Option indicate whether a second condition should be considered And indicates that both conditions must be met to trigger the breakpoint Or indicates that either condition can be met Then indicates that the First Condition must be
44. Input File Assembly Code for DSP56000 Family 6 8 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56100 Family 6 8 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56300 Family 6 9 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56600 Family 6 9 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56800 Family 6 10 Input File Assembly Code for DSP96000 Family 6 10 Output File Designators for Specific Suite56 DSP Devices 6 11 Designations for Memory Space and Address Registers 6 12 Ouput File Assembly Code for DSP56000 Family 6 14 Output File Assembly Code for DSP56100 Family 6 14 ix For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 10 1 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 Freescale Semiconductor Inc Output File Assembly Code for DSP56300 Family 6 15 Output File Assembly Code for DSP56600 Family 6 15 Output File Assembly Code for DSP56800 Family 6 16 Output File Assembly Code for DSP96000 Family 6 16 Symbol Names and Line Numbers 2 000000 e eee 10 5 Command Syntax A Soho thebeats out eh G thoes Lew tee ke 13 5 List of ADDICVIAUIONS 5 4 0 2 t 3 ot a he bee ely de o E 13 6 Examples of BREAK on DSP devices with OnCE or JTAG OnCE Ports 00 cece eee eee 13 13 OUTPUT Command ns ads pr
45. Load OnCE Command Sequence 00 eee eee 13 17 CSAVE Save Command Converter Memory toa File 13 18 CSTEP Step Through OnCE Sequence ooooooooooooooooooos 13 18 CTRACE Trace Through OnCE Sequence 0 020 ee eee 13 19 CHANGE Change Register or Memory Value 000 13 20 COPY Copy a Memory Block sor ios 13 21 DEVICE Select Default DESEA AR ES 13 22 DISASSEMBLE Single Line Disassembler 04 13 24 DISPLAY Display Register or Memory 0 0 0 eee eee eee 13 25 DOWN Move Down the C Function Call Stack o o oo o o o 13 26 EVALUATE Evaluate an Expression 0 0 cece eee cece eens 13 27 FINISH Step Until End of Current Subroutine 13 28 FORCE Assert RESET or BREAK on Target 20 000 13 28 FRAME Select C Function Call Stack Frame 0000 13 29 GO Execute DSP Programs ico ES 13 29 HELP ADS Debugger Help 2 23 2 vb As whee es 13 30 HOST Change HOST Interface Address 0 00 00 0 000 13 31 INPUT Assign Input File sesoun apea A 13 32 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc 1528 LIST List source File Lines ngas0cynteaing ei tala ea nn ee y Mew ey Rew Re 13 29 LOAD Loads DSP Piles Avy tl baie go wt boa ee Vee AAA See 13 30 LOG Log Commands or
46. Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc GO Execute DSP Program The RU reset to User mode argument asserts the RESET on the DSP pin only and does not assert a debug request thus bringing the DSP out of reset into the mode specified by the external mode pins which can be set by the user The S System argument causes a CFORCE R followed by a FORCE R of the devices specified in the command This command basically resets the Command Converter and then the target putting it into the Debug mode of operation Example 13 20 FORCE Command Command Explanation force r Force a reset on the current default target DSP address This command will destroy the contents of some registers since a hardware reset initializes them automatically force b Force the current default target DSP address into the Debug mode of operation Program execution will halt and the DSP will enter the Debug mode waiting for command entry from the Host computer via the OnCE debug port force dv1 4 5 b Force target DSPs 1 4 and 5 to halt DSP program execution and enter the Debug mode of operation for user commands force ru Reset the default target DSP into the User mode specified by its mode pins 13 23 FRAME Select C Function Call Stack Frame FRAME dev_list fn The FRAME command is used to select the current call stack frame It can be used in conjunctio
47. Reset Command Converter include simcom h include driver h int dspd_cc_reset device_index int device_index dspd_cc_reset resets the Command Converter device_index The return value is DSP_OK for success DSP_ERROR if the reset fails See Example 14 7 Example 14 7 dspd_cc_reset Reset Command Converter include simcom h include driver h int devn status devn 0 status dspd_cc_reset devn 14 2 8 dspd_cc_revision Read Command Convertor Revision Number include simcom h include driver h int dspd_cc_revision device_index revstring int device_index Command Converter affected by command char revstring pointer to buffer to receive revision number string e dspd_cc_revision returns a text string containing the version number of the monitor for Command Converter device_index in the buffer pointed to by revstring The message is created with the format Command Converter monitor revision 4 2f The return value is DSP_OK for success DSP_ERROR 1f the reset fails See Example 14 8 Motorola Library Functions 14 13 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 8 dspd_cc_revision Read CC monitor revision number include simcom h include driver h int devn status char rev_buf devn 0 rev_buf unsigned long
48. Second Condition Po Access Address Qualifier Breakpoint Number C Read Equal Expression C White Not Equal 1 xi C Read write C Greater Than Execute C Less Than Count 1 aj Address Ei Cancel Figure 2 6 Setting a Software Breakpoint 2 Under Breakpoint Number select the number you want to assign to this breakpoint The default number that is shown is the next available number Breakpoint numbers do not have to be consecutive they can be assigned arbitrarily For example it may be convenient to allocate breakpoints so that one function is assigned breakpoints 1 to 10 another 11 to 20 and so on 3 Under Count specify how many times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before performing the action For example if you set the count to 3 the breakpoint will be triggered the third time that the breakpoint is encountered Real time execution will be affected if you set the count to more than one 2 12 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints 4 If you have assigned an input file you can mark EOF The breakpoint will be acted upon when the input file reaches an end of file If you have marked EOF under Input File Number select the number of the input file The input file number is the number that you designated when you assigned the input file 5 Under T
49. Session Output 0 0 0 0 0 e eee 13 31 MORE Enable Disable Session Paging 0000s 13 32 NEXT Step Through Subroutine Calls or Macros 04 13 33 OUTPUT Assie M Output Pile 4 5 46 222 6 454 e eles Bed inne g 13 34 PATH Define File Directory Path 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 13 35 QUIT Quit Debugger Session ie OL ee eee oles 13 36 RADIX Change Input or Display Radix 0 20000 13 37 REDIRECT Redirect stdin stdout stderr for C Programs 13 38 SAVE Save Memory To File ch scored sae CP oe ea eee SHR 13 39 STEP Step Through DSP Programs cronista 13 40 STREAMS Enable Disable Handling of I O for C Programs 13 41 SYSTEM Execute Operating System Commands 13 42 TRACE Trace Through DSP Program 0 cece eee 13 43 TYPE Display the Result Type of a C Expression 13 44 UNLOCK Unlock Password Protected Device Type 13 45 UN Fils Step Unul Address 555 34 oth oh ada idad 13 46 UP Move Up the C Function Call Stack oo ooooommoom o 13 47 VIEW Select Display Mode 0 a See Ga 13 48 WAIT Wait Specified Time 3 54 5 4 wy ses 13 49 WATCH Set Modify View or Clear Watch IteM 13 50 WASM GUI Assembly Window 0 0000 cee eee eee eee 13 51 WBREAKPOINT GUI Breakpoint Window 24 13 52 WCALLS GUI C Calls Stack Wi
50. Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 To use device from the command line see Section 13 16 DEVICE Select Default Device on page 13 22 11 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Repeat Button 11 7 Repeat Button The Repeat button repeats the last command in the history buffer See Figure 11 7 npm Hes oee Siete E AEE EE tes Re yu Breall 2 p 500019 h devzb pe Gide cyr 244 x HHHHHHHHHHHH y HHHHHHHHHHHH a aggggagennpnnn b I DDDDDDDDDODAQ xISSHHNHMH xH SHHHHHH r HHHHHH 10H DIeSHHMHHH o yHeSHHHHHH ARA uteSH 32 gag at DDDDDO 39 ggaaaa r5 DDODAA ns a hys HH hi HHHHHH o H SHHHHHH AHHH nhi H ra SOMDA ng 9 a Figure 11 7 Repeat Button The Repeat button repeats the last command in the history buffer that is the last command listed in the Command window Pressing this button is the same as clicking on the last command in the Command window and pressing ENTER You can find more information about the repeat command in Section 12 3 Command Window on page 12 3 Motorola Debugger Toolbar 11 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Reset Button 11 8 Reset Button The Reset button resets the current device See Figure 11 8 upm Hea oee Sie lan EAEE E Bre
51. The Debugger assumes the lod extension 3 Click Open Keep in mind that the object file is loaded into the memory of the current device If you want to load the file into another device you must first select that device as the default device For more information see section 2 2 Setting and Clearing the Path section 4 4 Saving Object Files on page 4 5 section 7 2 Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 section 7 4 Loading Debugger State Files on page 7 7 and section 13 29 LOAD Load DSP Files on page 13 36 2 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting Up the Display Environment 2 4 Setting Up the Display Environment Two windows are displayed when the Debugger first starts the Session window and the Command window You might need to scroll around to get both windows into view at the same time but the screen should look something like Figure 2 3 ADS56300 File Display Modify Execute Windows Help 3142 3220 2 Unable to communicate with device Dv1 wsession wcommand Command Al ES device dv0 ccO tms0 pos0 56301 device dy1 ccl tms0 pos0 56301 wsession weommand Freescale Semiconductor Inc asm break cchange cdisplay cforce cgo lt space gt more Figure 2 3 Setting Up the Display Environment Motorola Getting Started 2 7 For More Information On Thi
52. a Software Breakpoint 3 10 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Set Software The Set Breakpoint dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 appears Set Breakpoint Type First Condition Pee Type Access Address Qualifier f Halt Note ldma Read Equal El C Write Not Equal Show Read Write C Greater Than Command plat Li C Execute C Less Than C Increment CNT1 P y C Increment CNT2 C Increment CNT3 Address C Increment CNT4 Option And C Or 7 Then Command C Only Second Condition o Access Address Qualifier Breakpoint Number C Read Equal Expression Write Not Equal xi C Read Write Greater Than Execute Less Than Count aj Address EZ m Figure 3 6 Setting a Software Breakpoint 2 Under Breakpoint Number select the number you want to assign to this breakpoint The default number that is shown is the next available number Breakpoint numbers do not have to be consecutive they can be assigned arbitrarily For example it may be convenient to allocate breakpoints so that one function is assigned breakpoints 1 to 10 another 11 to 20 and so on Under Count specify how many times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before performing the action For example if you set the count to 3 the breakpoint will be triggered the third time that the breakpoint is encountered Real time execution will
53. access Table 3 10 DSP96000 Family Hardware Breakpoint Types Breakpoint Type Meaning pcf break on any Program core fetch read only pem break on Program read fetch or move read only pcfm break on Program access fetch or P move r w pdma break on Program memory DMA access xa break on X data memory access r w ya break on Y data memory access r w xdma break on X memory DMA access ydma break on Y memory DMA access For more information see section 3 7 Types of Software Breakpoints and section 3 8 Hardware Breakpoints Motorola Controlling Execution 3 21 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints 3 10 Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints Breakpoints can be enabled and disabled While disabled breakpoints have no effect on DSP program execution and do not cause any of the actions associated with the breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Enable or Disable A dialog box similar to the one in Figure 3 8 appears Disable Breakpoints Eq Breakpoint Number Figure 3 8 Disable Breakpoints Dialog Box 2 Highlight the breakpoint that you want enabled or disabled 3 Click OK You can see a list of all breakpoints by displaying the current breakpoint The Debugger also indicates breakpoints in the Assembly window and Source window
54. access hwbp_typel addr_qual addr _block break_qual addr_qual address t expression count action Syntax for Hardware Breakpoints on the DSP56000 DSP56100 DSP56800 and DSP9600 Families BREAK dev_list bn access hwbp_type addr _block count action The BREAK command can be used to set clear enable and or disable breakpoints Breakpoints when triggered can cause program execution to halt and the device to enter the Debug mode of operation There are two types of breakpoints hardware breakpoints and software breakpoints Software breakpoints are very similar to hardware breakpoints However software breakpoints are more limited than hardware breakpoints in that e software breakpoints can only be set on the first word of an instruction they cannot be set to detect the access of registers or data memory e software breakpoints must be set in RAM they cannot be set in ROM Despite the above limitations it is recommended that you use software breakpoints instead of hardware breakpoints whenever possible This is recommended because in effect only one hardware breakpoint can be set at a time whereas a virtual unlimited number of software breakpoints can be set Software Breakpoints The optional parameter dev_list represents the device or list of devices on which the breakpoints will be set 13 10 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www free
55. alternate paths 1 From the File menu choose Path then select Clear Alternate Path List The list of alternate paths is cleared for all devices The path of the working directory is not cleared Keep in mind that a separate working directory is maintained for each device However all devices share the same alternate directory paths To be safe always check the path of the working directory after adding a device or setting the default device Remember that in order to change the path of a device that is not currently the default device you must first change the default device For information see section 2 3 Loading Object Files section 7 2 Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 section 13 34 PATH Define File Directory Path on page 13 42 2 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Loading Object Files 2 3 Loading Object Files You can load DSP Object Module Format OMF files or Common Object File Format COFF files directly into the Debugger memory OMF files are identified by the lod extension COFF files are identified by the cld extension Motorola s SuiteS6 DSP Assembler generates both file formats You can also generate both of the file formats with the DSP Debugger when saving object To load a COFF cld file 1 From the File menu choose Load then select Memory COFF The dialog box in
56. atid 7 5 beading Debusser State Piles ria ed 7 7 Changing and Saving Window Preferences 0 0 00 e eee eee ee 7 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 8 Debugging C Source Code 8 1 Moving Up and Down the Call Stack 0 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 8 2 Displayine the Call Stack anero E A 8 3 Monitoring C Function Calls usar Ad 8 4 Enabling Disabling IO Streams 0 0 00 cee eee ee 8 5 Redirecting an MOSES SA 8 6 Displaying the Type of a C Expression 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee Chapter 9 Macros Scripts and Log Files 9 1 Creating and Running a Command Macro 0 000 e eee eee ee 9 2 Logging Output from the Session Window 0 002 e eee ee ee Chapter 10 Expressions 1061 OP valiiate EXpressionss sece ab es Use De keh 10 2 Using Memory Space Symbols ni oe ean AA 10 3 Using Register Name Symbols cul ir es B oS oa a ade BOSS x 10 4 Using Assembler Debug Symbols 0 0 00 eee eee 103 Usmo EOS oak eee A mies ace toe atid da uE 10 6 Operators in EXpressiOns ss escort Pe ie 10 7 Setting Up and Modifying a Watch liSt o oooooooommmmm Chapter 11 Debugger Toolbar EA GoBu ttoh nt A BN OE RE Pw A ORES Oe DIEZ Stop BUON isa e ao e e le LL Step Buttons oso das a res eh AEAT WAL Next Button AA oe EP ORE E es E AAA OP aaa a a
57. be affected if you set the count to more than one If you have assigned an input file you can mark EOF The breakpoint will be acted upon when the input file reaches an end of file If you have marked EOF under Input File Number select the number of the input file The input file number is the number that you designated when you assigned the input file Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Software Breakpoints 5 Under Type select the type of software breakpoint to set If you select al the breakpoint will always be acted upon Breakpoint types other than al are conditional and device specific See Table 3 1 for a list of software breakpoints 6 Under Address type the address where you want the breakpoint to be set For example to set a breakpoint at address 103 in p memory type p 103 Note This address must be the first word of an instruction Note If you have set the breakpoint type in step 5 to a conditional breakpoint that is any type other than al the breakpoint can only be set to an address which contains a nop Setting the breakpoint to an address which contains any other opcode will cause your program to execute incorrectly 7 Under Expression you can type an expression The expression will be evaluated when the address you specified is reached If the expression is true the breakpoint will be triggered If t
58. before the number denotes value as hexadecimal denotes value as decimal denotes value as binary 6 Click OK See Section 5 4 Displaying Memory Values on page 5 4 and section 7 3 Changing the Radix To change the radix from the command line see Section 13 14 CHANGE Change Register or Memory Value on page 13 20 5 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Copying Memory 5 6 Copying Memory You can copy memory from one location to another either one address at a time or in blocks The source and destination memory maps may be different This allows you to move data or program code from one memory map to another or to a different address within the same memory map 5 6 1 To Copy Memory from One Block to Another 1 From the Modify menu choose Copy Memory The dialog box in Figure 5 7 appears Copy Memory x From To Memory Space Memory Space P gt p gt Start Address Start Address End Address Cancel Apply Figure 5 7 Copy Memory Dialog Box 2 In the section labeled From Memory Space select the memory space to copy from Then type the in the starting address and the ending address of the block that you want copied 3 In the section labeled To Memory Space select the memory space to copy to Then type in the starting address to begin copying values
59. board address on PC systems DOS or WINDOWS devt ype indicates which family of DSP devices is being used ads_startup must be called before calling dsp_startup Valid values for devt ype are ADSP56000 ADSP56300 ADSP96000 The function return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 2 14 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 2 ads_ startup Initialize ADS software PC include simcom h include protocom h int status status ads_startup 100 ADSP56000 Initialize ADS software UNIX include simcom h include protocom h int status status ads_startup dev mdsp0 ADSP56000 14 2 3 dspd_break Force Running DSP into Debug Mode include cc h include simcom h include driver h int dspd_break device_index command int device_index DSP device to be affected by command int command command to be sent to DSP device dspd_break forces the target device device_index into debug mode using the method specified by the parameter command Valid values for command are e DSP_JTAG_BREAK used for devices with JTAG port e DSP_ONCE_BREAK used for devices with OnCE port The function return
60. buffer for 1 0 1 lt 10 i buffer i And discard it dsp_free_mem char buffer 14 2 41 dsp_go Initiate DSP Program Execution include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_go device_index int device_index DSP device to start executing dsp_go Starts the target device device_index to begin executing in real time from the address specified by the current program counter The function returns TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 41 Example 14 41 dsp_go start DSP 0 executing include simcom h include protocom h int devn status char load_fname filter2 cld devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dsp_ldmem devn load_fname load program into memory status dsp_go devn start program execution Motorola Library Functions 14 41 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 42 dsp_go_address Initiate Program Execution from Address include simcom h include protocom h dsp_go_address device_index address int device_index DSP device affected by command unsigned long address address from which to start executing dsp_go_address causes the target device device_index to begin executing in real time from the address
61. create a situation where personal injury or death may occur Should Buyer purchase or use Motorola products for any such unintended or unauthorized application Buyer shall indemnify and hold Motorola and its officers employees subsidiaries affiliates and distributors harmless against all claims costs damages and expenses and reasonable attorney fees arising out of directly or indirectly any claim of personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use even if such claim alleges that Motorola was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part Motorola and 44 are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc Motorola Inc is an Equal Opportunity Affirmative Action Employer All other tradenames trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Copyright Motorola Inc 1999 All rights reserved For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Features of the Debueser ia A 1 3 1 2 Configuring the Operating Environment 0 0 20 e eee ee eee 1 3 1 3 Specifying a Command Convert oxida a we aves eMeeaws 1 5 1 4 Entering Commands a A RA AS R S 1 7 Chapter 2 Getting Started 2il gt Resetting iS System tice yi ie a ee Oe a UL Mathie Td e Neto 2 2 22 Setting a d Clearing Cie Paty ies A Baa oe OE ed A OS 2 2 2 3 Loads Object Flesh ir A AA alee aes 2 5 2
62. defined reset exception The optional break_number parameter may be used to cause the code execution to halt only if that particular breakpoint condition occurs All other breakpoint conditions are ignored The optional count parameter may be used to cause the code execution to halt only if the breakpoint has occurred a specified number of times The occurrence count may only be used with the break_number parameter Example 13 22 GO Command go dv0 1 Start DSP program execution from the current address specified by the program counter of target DSP addresses O and 1 The target DSP addresses will stop at the first occurrence of any breakpoint set and report to the user the register results go 100 Start DSP program execution at program memory address hex 100 of the current default target DSP address go 100 5 3 Start DSP program execution at location 100 default radix of the current default target DSP address and halt on the third occurrence of breakpoint number 5 13 25 HELP ADS Debugger Help HELP dev_num command reg command The HELP command allows the user to review the Application Development System command set or a particular command s description The HELP line for command entry is designed so that a minimum amount of documentation is required to use the ADS interface program 13 30 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Sem
63. docmd devn startup Begin the startup macro while sv_const in_macro Until end of macro file sim_gmcmd devn command_string Get command from macro file sim_docmd devn command_string Execute command string Motorola Library Functions 14 59 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Emulator Screen Management Functions 14 2 66 sim_gtcmd Get Command String from Terminal include simcom h include protocom h sim_gtcmd device_index command_string int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command char command_string Pointer to return buffer for command line sim_gtcmd gets the next command string from the terminal in an interactive mode The command line editing command expansion and on line help functions are invoked by this terminal command input function The command string is fully checked for errors prior to returning The command_st ring buffer should be at least 80 characters See Example 14 66 Example 14 66 sim_gtcmd Get and execute emulator commands for device until a go type command TS entered include simcom h include protocom h include simusr h extern struct sim const sv_const Emulator device structures char command_string 80 int devn devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Create new DSP structure while sv_const sv devn gt
64. dspd_read_memory devn mem_space addr count value Read memory block from DSP device dspd_read_once_registers devn reg_num count value Read once registers from DSP device dspd_reset devn reset_mode Reset specified DSP device dspd_status devn mode Determine DSP status dspd_write_core_registers devn reg _num count value Write core registers to DSP device dspd_write_memory devn mem_space addr count value Write to memory in DSP device dspd_write_once_registers devn reg_num count value Write once registers from DSP device 14 1 2 4 DSP Device Specific Routines Table 14 4 lists DSP device specific routines Table 14 4 dspt_ DSP Device Specific Routines Routine Description dspt_masm_xxXXXX mnemonic Ops err Assemble mnemonic string to ops dspt_unasm_xXxXxXXX ops sr omr sdbp Disassemble DSP opcodes 14 1 2 5 Command Converter Interface Routines Table 14 5 lists command converter interface routines Table 14 5 dsp_cc_ Command Converter Interface Routines Routine Description dsp_cc_fmem device mtype addr Fill Command Converter memory block count value dsp_cc_go devn Start program on Command Converter dsp_cc_ldmem devn loadfn Load Command Converter Memory from file 14 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Informati
65. e Source level symbolic debug of assembly and C source programs e Conditional or unconditional software and hardware breakpoints e Program patching using a single line assembler e Session and or command logging for later reference e Loading and saving of files to from ADM memory e Macro command definition and execution e Display registers and memory e Debug commands supporting multiple DSP development e Hexadecimal decimal binary fractional floating point calculator e Multiple input output file access from DSP object programs e On line help screens for each command and DSP register e Compatibility with Motorola s Suite56 DSP Assembler amp Simulator e Single command converter supporting OnCE and JTAG protocols 1 2 Configuring the Operating Environment The ADS hardware and software is supported on the following platforms e PC compatibles e Hewlett Packard HP UX 9 x operating system e Sun 4 x operating system e Solaris 5 x operating system Motorola Introduction 1 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Specifying a Command Converter 1 2 1 PC Compatible Requirements A PC compatible computer should meet the following minimum requirements e Processor 486 100 MHZ or faster e Memory 32 Mbytes of RAM e Operating system Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 e Storage 8 Mbytes of free space on hard drive e Peripherals mouse keyboard CD ROM drive e Ports One 16 bit I O IS
66. entire ADS state including memory contents breakpoint settings and the current pointer position of any open files This file is in an internal format that is efficient for the ADS Interface program to store and load see the LOAD s command description The default suffix for an ADS state filename is adm If memory blocks are specified instead of S the specified memory areas are stored in Macro_Assembler object module format so the file may be reloaded with the LOAD command The default suffix for an OMF file is lod If a filename suffix of cld is explicitly specified a COFF file will be created If a file currently exists with the filename specified the user will be prompted for an action of either appending the data to the file overwriting the file or aborting the command The selection of the file action may be included in the command line using the o overwrite a append or the c cancel argument This is useful when executing macro command files Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 45 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc STEP Step Through DSP Program Example 13 37 SAVE Command save p 0 Sff x 0 20 sessionl Save all three memory maps to OMF file session1 lod of the current default target DSP address Prompt for required action if file already exists save s lunchbrk Save the default ADS state to filename lunchbrk adm Prompt for required action 1
67. executing The values loaded into the pipeline via opcode and operand should be the values saved from the pipeline when the device entered debug mode if execution is required to continue from a specific address the values loaded should form a long jump instruction to the required execution start address opcode opcode for long jump to required execution start address Symbolic names are defined for JUMP opcodes for the device families in simcom h operand address of long jump target execution start address The function returns DSP_OK on successful completion DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 13 14 18 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 13 dspd_go Start execution from address 0x1000 include simcom h include protocom h include driver h int err status devn devn 0 err dsp_load lunchbrk adm reload devices and program data status dspd_go devn DSP_LONGJUMP_56K 0x10001 amp execute from 0x1000 14 2 14 dspd_jtag_reset Reset JTAG Communications include simcom h include driver h int dspd_jtag_reset device_index reset_type int device_index device affected by command int reset_type type of reset to perform dspd_jtag_reset resets the JTAG TAP controller for the device de
68. expressed simply as a decimal integer preceded by the character when referring to a line in the current source file If an address field is being specified in a command the character can be omitted A line number in a particular source file should be expressed in the form source_filename line_number 10 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Using Assembler Debug Symbols Table 10 1 provides valid forms of symbol names and line numbers Table 10 1 Symbol Names and Line Numbers Syntax Description symbol_name Translates to the address associated with symbol_name Example change pc lab_d symbol_name Translates to the address associated with symbol_name Example disassemble start_1 section_name symbol_ Translates to the address associated with symbol_name in section section_name Example display sec3 xdata name section_name symbol Translates to the address associated with symbol_name in section section_name _name Example display sec3 xdata line number Translates to the address associated with line_number in the current source file Example break 30 line number Translates to the address associated with line_number in the current source file Example change pc 30 source filenamellin Translates to the address associated with line_number in the named source file _num
69. filename The device memory contents are not altered Only the COFF format files cld suffix are supported by this option If B is specified as the second parameter the third parameter must be an address offset which is added to the OMF data record start address where data is to be loaded The file must be in OMF and will be loaded byte wide sequentially incrementing the address counter on each byte load The low order byte will be loaded first and the high order byte will be loaded last in each word This is similar to the byte wide loading format of the bootstrap loader program on the DSP This feature allows users to download programs into RAM and debug bootloader or overlay programs Example 13 29 LOAD Command Command Explanation load source testloop lod Load testloop lod file from directory source load lasttest Load lasttest lod file from current directory If not found look for lastltest cld and load load s lunchbrk Load lunchbrk adm ADS state load m test cld Load the COFF format test cld file ignoring any symbolic debug information in it load d test cld Load the symbolic debug information from the COFF format test cld file ignoring the memory contents of the file load b 300 bootprog lod Load the bootprog lod file writing the least significant byte first and most significant byte last into each consecutive memory location of the target The 300 argument is an addres
70. followed by the exponent The special constants inf and nan can be used in floating point expressions to represent the IEEE floating point values of infinity and not a number for DSP devices which operate with IEEE floating point values For example 12345 integer 6E10 floating point 6 floating point 2 7e2 floating point A constant can be written without a leading radix indicator by changing the radix For example a hexadecimal constant can be written without the leading dollar sign if the input radix is set to hex The default for the input radix is decimal For more information see Section 7 3 Changing the Radix on page 7 5 10 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Operators in Expressions 10 6 Operators in Expressions Some operators can be used with both floating point and integer values If one of the operands of the operator has a floating point value and the other has an integer value the integer will be converted to a floating point value before the operator is applied and the result will be floating point If both operands of the operator are integers the result will be an integer value Similarly if both the operands are floating point the result will be a floating point value Operators recognized by the Debugger include the following 10 6 1 Unary Operators minus negate Integer
71. in its program memory address hexadecimal 1000 and display the result using the default radix evaluate b 345 Convert hexadecimal 345 to binary and display the result evaluate h 10101010 p r0 Calculate the bitwise AND of program memory address specified by the value in rO register and the binary value 10101010 and display the result in hexadecimal evaluate a0 Sb0 Calculate the sum of hexadecimal a0 plus hexadecimal b0 evaluate count Display the value of the C variable count evaluate count max Evaluate the sum of the C variables count and max and display the result Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 27 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc FINISH Step Until End of Current Subroutine Example 13 18 EVALUATE Command Command Explanation evaluate lookup i Call the C function lookup from the command line with the argument i Display the result of calling the function 13 21 FINISH Step Until End of Current Subroutine FINISH dev_list The FINISH command executes instructions until a Return To System RTS instruction is executed within the current subroutine The ADS interface program simply steps checking if any instruction is an RTS If so that RTS is executed and instruction execution halts immediately afterward While stepping if a branch to subroutine or jump to subroutine
72. in simdev h and are used by both the display and non display versions of the emulator The prefixes st_ and dt_ are used for structure names of device type structures that is structures which must be defined for each device type The prefixes sim_ and dev_ are used for structure names of general device or simulation structures Global variable names may have a prefix dx_ dv_ sx_ or sv_ The prefix dx_ is used for variables of dt_ structures The prefix dv_ is used for variables of dev_ structures The prefix sx_ is used for variables of st_ structures The prefix sv_ is used for variables of sev_ structures A list of emulator global variables is included in the distribution file named global sym 14 70 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Modification of Emulator Global Structures 14 8 Modification of Emulator Global Structures The source file simglob c which is included in the emulator package contains the global structures sv_const and dv_const There are some useful modifications described below that can be made to the constant definitions at the beginning of simglob c The simglob c module must then be recompiled and relinked using the make file provided with the emulator package DSP_MAXDEVICES This define constant determines the maximum number of devices that can be allocated using the emulator s device command As a def
73. index and register number for register n3 include simcom h include protocom h int devn int regnum pnum int ok devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 ok dsp_findreg devn n3 amp pnum regnum Get index for n3 register A 14 38 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 38 dsp_fmem Fill Memory Block with a Value include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h dsp_fmem device_index memory_map address block_size value int device_index DSP device to be affected by command enum memory_map memory_map memory designator unsigned long address DSP memory start address to write unsigned long block_size Number of locations to write unsigned long value Pointer to value to write to memory location dsp_fmen initializes a block of DSP memory with a single value The memory_map parameter is a memory type that selects the appropriate dt_memory structure from dt_var mem for the selected device device_index These structures are described in the simdev h file which is included with the emulator The memory_map parameter can be obtained with the function dsp_findmem by using the memory name as a key Use the emulator help mem command for a list of valid
74. indicate what kind of access should be detected by the breakpoint For example if you want the breakpoint to detect when a memory location is read but not written to select Read If you want either a read or a write to be detected chose Read Write etc Under Address Qualifier indicate the qualifier for the address location Under Address type the address that the breakpoint references 2 16 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints 5 Under Option indicate whether a second condition should be considered And indicates that both conditions must be met to trigger the breakpoint Or indicates that either condition can be met Then indicates that the First Condition must be satisfied followed by the Second Condition Only indicates that only the first condition must be met to trigger the breakpoint 6 Under Second Condition specify the conditions for the second condition This will only apply if you have indicated so under Option in step 5 7 Under Breakpoint Number select the number you want to assign to this breakpoint The default number shown is the next available number Breakpoint numbers do not have to be consecutive they can be assigned arbitrarily For example it may be convenient to allocate breakpoints so that one function is assigned breakpoints to 10 another uses 11 to 20 and so on
75. instruction is encountered tests for the RTS instruction are suspended until execution resumes at the address following the subroutine call Example 13 19 FINISH Command finish Finish the current subroutine continuing from the current address until an RTS is executed 13 22 FORCE Assert RESET or BREAK on Target FORCE dev_list R reset to Debug mode B break RU reset to User mode S System The FORCE command asserts a hardware reset or asserts a debug request on one or more target systems This command is useful for reinitializing all registers as well as peripherals to their Reset state or when the user wishes to halt real time executing of the target DSP to interrogate its registers and or memory All communication with the target DSP program model must be done while the target DSP is in the Debug mode of operation Asserting a debug request is only required once to enter the Debug mode Exiting the Debug mode is accomplished via a GO TRACE or STEP command or a FORCE RU The B break argument asserts a debug request on the DSP and the register values will not be altered Program execution can be resumed after a break by using a GO command The R reset to Debug mode argument asserts the debug request on the DSP after the RESET pin is asserted and continues asserting the debug request until after the RESET pin is de asserted thus bringing the DSP into the Debug mode of operation at reset 13 28 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s
76. limitation is that the full save filename must be specified No automatic expansion is done for the working path or filename suffix as in the higher level emulator calls The dsp_save function is described in Section 14 2 54 dsp_save Save All DSP Structures to State File 14 4 3 Executing Device Instructions After creating a new device as described in Section 14 4 1 Creating a New Device and loading a program or state file as described in Section 14 4 2 Loading Program Code or Device State the emulator is ready to execute the program code Execution begins at the start address specified in the load file or continues from the previous location in an emulator state file The user s code may select a new execution address by writing register pc using the dsp_wreg function or with dsp_go_address 14 4 4 Testing Breakpoint Conditions The command line interface in the display version of the emulator provides facilities to specify breakpoint conditions When the breakpoint condition is met during user program execution the emulator displays the enabled registers assuming the breakpoint action is halt The non display emulator does not provide a way to specify breakpoint conditions It is up to the user s code to examine device registers or memory conditions and decide whether or not to continue execution The device registers and memory can be examined using the dsp_rreg and dsp_rmem functions The emulato
77. making sure that the windows settings are saved in Window Preferences You will probably also have command macros that set the path load the program and set up watch expressions Once you are comfortable with these basics you can then become familiar with more complex debugging by using simulated device input and output I O If you are using C code as your source code you will also want to learn about specific commands useful in debugging C source code For more information see Chapter 6 Input and Output Files Chapter 7 Debugger and Device Configurations Chapter 8 Debugging C Source Code Chapter 10 Expressions Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference Chapter 11 Debugger Toolbar Motorola Getting Started 2 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Resetting the System 2 1 Resetting the System The Debugger can reset the entire system at once including the command converter This is useful when you want to reinitialize all registers and peripherals and also want to reset the command converter to recognize that the target device is in Debug mode To reset the system e From the execute menu choose Reset hen select System The command converter and the target device are both reset The target device is reset to the debug mode For more information see section 13 22 FORCE Assert RESET or BREAK on Target on page 13 28
78. memory names The memory_map enum is memory_map_ concatenated with a valid memory map name As an example memory_map_ pa refers to off chip pa memory on the 96002 device If the selected memory map requires two word values the least significant word should be at the value location and the most significant word at the value 1 location See Example 14 38 Example 14 38 dsp_fmem Write 300 locations beginning at P 200 with the value 4 include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h int devn unsigned long address memval blocksize address 0x200L blocksize 300 memval 4L devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 dsp_fmem devn memory_map_p address blocksize amp memval Motorola Library Functions 14 39 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 39 dsp_free Free a Device Structure include simcom h include protocom h dsp free device_index int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command dsp_free frees all allocated memory associated with a device structure for device_index and closes any open files associated with the device structure See Example 14 39 Example 14 39 dsp_free Create thr new device structures then get rid of device 2 include simcom h include protocom h ads_startu
79. memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 3 6 DSP96000 Family The input file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 32 bit register Indicate these by writing the File Number in the upper 16 bits and the count in the lower 16 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 O P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 8 Input File Assembly Code for DSP96000 Family Operation Comment MOVE S0003000c X0 input from file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE 100 R0 begin writing data at address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode For more information see section 6 2 Assigning an Input File 6 10 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Assigning an Output File 6 4 Assigning an Output File You can write data from a target device to a file The output will be written in ASCII format and can be written in the radix that you specify Before opening an output file there is some preparation that you must perform outside of the Debugger in order for the data to be correctly written to the output file You will need to place a debug instruction in your program and you will need to set designators in certain registers You need to do this so that the Debugger knows when to perform the data transfer f
80. or floating point Logical operators are primarily intended for use with the Debugger BREAK command 10 6 7 Operator Precedence Expressions are evaluated with the following operator precedence 1 parenthetical expression innermost first unary minus unary negate unary logical negation multiplication division mod addition subtraction shift less than greater than less or equal greater or equal equal not equal bitwise AND bitwise EOR 10 bitwise OR 11 logical AND 12 logical OR Se eee OO A ee eS Operators of the same precedence are evaluated left to right All integer results including intermediate of expression evaluation are 32 bit truncated integers Valid operands include numeric constants memory addresses or register symbols The logical bitwise unary negate unary logical negation and shift operators cannot be applied to floating point operands That is if the evaluation of an expression after operator precedence has been applied results in a floating point number on either side of any of these operators an error will be generated Motorola Expressions 10 9 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting Up and Modifying a Watch list 10 7 Setting Up and Modifying a Watch list You can watch the contents of a specific memory location register or any arbitrary value or expression by setting up a Watch window The Watch window displays a li
81. page 13 32 6 3 Examples of How to Assign an Input File There is some preparation that you must perform outside of the Debugger in order for the data from an input file to be written properly All of this preparation can be written into your program Your program will tell the Debugger the destination from which the data should be retrieved how much data to get where to put the data and when to perform the data transfer These four pieces of information are communicated by including these four elements in your program 1 a designation of the input file number and data length 2 a designation of the memory space to write to 3 the beginning address to write to and 4 a debug instruction The following code snippets demonstrate assembly code that you might use in your program to indicate these four elements Motorola Input and Output Files 6 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Input File 6 3 1 DSP56000 Family The input file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 24 bit register Indicate these by writing the file number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 16 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 0 P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 3 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56000 Family Operation Comment MOVE S03000c X0 inpu
82. parameter file number represents the number to assign or that has been assigned to an input file The optional parameter OFF closes the input file designated by file number If no file number is indicated all open input files are closed The address parameter is required when opening an input file This address represents the address where the DEBUG instruction resides The TERM parameter is required to create an input file the contents of which are typed in at the keyboard The input data is in ASCII Alternatively an existing input file can be opened by providing a filename The input whether from the keyboard or from a file can be expressed in hexadecimal rh decimal rd unsigned ru or floating point rf If no radix is specified hexadecimal is assumed as the default There is some preparation that you must perform outside of the Debugger in order for the data from the input file to be written properly You will need to place a DEBUG instruction in your program and you will need to set designators in certain registers You need to do this so that the Debugger knows when to perform the data transfer from where to get the data how much data to get and where to put the data 13 32 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc INPUT Assign Input File 1 Write to the appropriate register a designator that will indicate
83. registers and memory is hexadecimal The use of the values of hex A or B require the preceding the value otherwise the values will be evaluated as the contents of the registers A or B respectively Example 13 35 RADIX Command Command Explanation radix Display the default radix currently enabled radix h Change default radix entry to hexadecimal Hexadecimal constant entries no longer require a preceding dollar sign but any decimal constants will require a preceding grave accent radix fa Change the default display radix for the long register a to display a fractional value whenever the a register is displayed radix u x 100 200 Enable the display radix for X data memory block 100 to 200 to be unsigned when displayed on the screen 13 37 REDIRECT Redirect stdin stdout stderr for C Programs REDIRECT dev_list STDIN OFF file REDIRECT dev_list STDOUT STDERR OFF file A 0 C REDIRECT dev_list OFF The REDIRECT command is used to redirect the stdin stdout stderr for C programs It allows the user to redirect stdin from a file and redirect stdout stderr to files No stream file redirection occurs while stream option is disabled Note No I O processing or handling of redirection occurs if the streams option has been disabled See STREAMS for more information 13 44 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www free
84. section 13 8 CFORCE Assert Reset or Break on Command Converter on page 13 16 2 2 Setting and Clearing the Path The Suite56 DSP Debugger makes use of two types of paths for saving and accessing files e the working directory path e alternate directory paths The working directory is the primary path It is the default directory used when searching for an input file assuming no path is explicitly specified with the input filename If an input file is not found in the working directory alternate paths are automatically searched The advantage to you is that object files source files and command macros can each be kept in separate directories but still accessed without having to constantly redefine the path 2 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing the Path To set the path of the working directory 1 From the File menu choose Path then select Set A dialog box similar to Figure 2 1 appears parent directory list of subdirectories Select Directory History Special View Volumes Wwin NTS y moves up directory tree gds563 GUI56 Ma GUIS63 moves down directory tree currently selected directory Directory GUIS635 Cancel Open Figure 2 1 Setting the Working Directory Path 2 If appropriate select another drive from the Volumes menu 3 Move up or down the dir
85. started by specifying a single register or memory location without an associated expression In this mode each register or memory location can be examined and optionally modified To change the register or memory location contents and display the next register or location type the new value followed by carriage return Subsequent or previous memory locations or register names can be examined and changed if required by typing respectively Up Arrow Ctrl U or Down Arrow Ctrl N Typing a new value followed by Up or Down arrow does not change the open location Pressing the Esc key causes the interactive CHANGE command to terminate 13 20 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc COPY Copy a Memory Block CAUTION Be aware that some peripheral registers contain handshake bits that change state when they are read Reading these registers can interfere with the proper operation of the peripheral when returning to the user s program The Session and Command windows are written during interactive change operations Both windows display the original CHANGE command the Session window displays each change as it is made Example 13 12 CHANGE Command Command Explanation change Displays the current default target DSP address s register values individually starting with register a You will be prompted to enter new values change x 55
86. stat executing Check for go If not sim_gtcmd devn command_string Get command and sim_docmd devn command_string Execute command 14 3 Emulator Screen Management Functions The following sections describe functions which are provided in source code form in the emulator package in the file scrmgr c These functions define all the operations associated with emulator terminal I O The code includes conditionally compiled sections for MSDOS UNIX and VMS The code is provided to allow customizing of the emulator terminal I O for a particular environment The user may for example wish to redefine the control characters used by the emulator so that they map to some particular terminal Table 14 8 is a quick reference list of the emulator screen management functions 14 60 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Emulator Screen Management Functions Table 14 8 Emulator Screen Management Functions Function Description simw_ceol Clear to end of line simw_ctribr Check for Ctrl C signal simw_cursor line column Move cursor to specified line column simw_endwin End the emulator display simw_getch Non translated keyboard input simw_gkey Translated keyboard input simw_putc c Output character to terminal simw_puts Output string to terminal at line and colu
87. the Input File Number and the word count of the data that you want to input You will assign the Input File Number to the input file later when you open it The register to which you write this information depends on the target device Device Family DSP56000 DSP56100 DSP56300 DSP56600 DSP56800 DSP96000 Designate the Input Designate the Input File Number and the File Number and word word count i e length of the data as count in register follows X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits RO File Number in the upper 16 bits count in the lower 16 bits 2 Write to the appropriate register a designator that indicates the memory space and to another register the address where you want the data to be written Designate the memory space as follows 0 p 1 x 2 y 3 1 Device Family DSP56000 DSP56100 DSP56300 Motorola Designate the Put the address where the input memory space in register data will be written in register RI RO RI RO RI RO Debugger Command Reference 13 33 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc INPUT Assign Input File DSP56600 Rl RO DSP56800 Rl RO DSP9
88. the addresses will be decremented rather than incremented copy xdat xdat 40 ydat Copy 40 memory locations beginning at the address corresponding to symbolic label xdat to the block beginning at address corresponding to symbolic label ydat 13 16 DEVICE Select Default Device DEVICE dev_list device_type ON OFF X DEVICE dev_num chain num tms num chain pos device_type DEVICE cc num tms num chain pos IR count The DEVICE command allows you to e Select the current device for command input and session output e Activate one or more of the target devices controlled by the ADS e Specify the device type of each target device e List the type and status of each device e Specify the position of devices in a JTAG chain e Specify non Motorola devices in a JTAG chain e Enable and disable each device 13 22 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc DEVICE Select Default Device e Deactivate a device and deallocate all associated structures The command line prompt displays the number of the currently selected device At start up device DVO is activated and selected as the current device e device_type specifies which type of DSP is being emulated If omitted a default value will be selected depending on the device family in use Use DEVICE command for a list of supported device types e ON makes the s
89. the display radix does not however affect the input radix To set the input or display radix from the command line see Section 13 36 RADIX Change Input or Display Radix on page 13 44 You can also find more infomration in Section 12 1 Displaying the Radix on page 12 1 7 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Loading Debugger State Files 7 4 Loading Debugger State Files You can reset the condition of the Debugger to a previous state This is done with a Debugger state file adm The state file acts like an initialization file which includes information about e the state of all DSP devices in the system and their device type e enabled registers counters status registers peripheral registers etc e the entire contents of memory e the windows settings and e the Session window output buffer for each device Essentially a state file contains all the information needed to exactly duplicate the condition of the Debugger as it existed when the state file was saved This may be used in several ways For example if you are in a long development session and want to take a break save the Debugger state to a state file so as not to lose your place Or if a particular part of a program is proving troublesome the state may be saved just before the problem area simplifying the setup for repeated attempts to isol
90. they can be assigned arbitrarily which means that you can assign output numbers in any way that helps you organize the output files 3 Under To select the destination of the output file Select File if the output data is to be written to a file Select Terminal if the output data is to be written to the Session window rather than a file 4 Under Debug Address type the address where the Debug instruction that will trigger this data transfer resides 5 Under Radix select the radix hexadecimal decimal etc in which the output data should be written 6 If the output data is being sent to a file under File Name type in the name of the output file or click on the File button to browse for the file The default filename extension is io The output file will be in ASCII format 7 Click OK For more information see section 6 5 Examples of How to Assign an Output File To assign an output file from the command line see Section 13 33 OUTPUT Assign Output File on page 13 40 6 5 Examples of How to Assign an Output File There is some preparation that you must perform outside of the Debugger in order for data to be correctly written to an output file You will need to place a debug instruction in your program and you will need to set designators in certain registers You need to do this so that the Debugger knows when to perform the data transfer from where to get the data how much data to get and where to put the dat
91. to be modified for specific circumstances Consideration always needs to be given to the case where the first instruction to be executed is itself the target of a breakpoint In this case step over that instruction before inserting the DEBUG instructions Adding or deleting of breakpoints needs to be handled Steps 4 and 11 above do not need to be tight loops Calls to dsp_check_service_request may be made at convenient points in other processing to determine when the device is ready 14 5 Multiple Device Emulation The ADSDSP emulator may be used to emulate a single DSP device or multiple devices As many devices as are required by the target configuration may be configured using the device command or dsp_new function The following sections describe some details about the way the emulator handles multiple devices Section 14 5 1 Allocation and Initialization of Multiple Devices describes the required steps to allocate and initialize multiple DSP structures Section 14 5 2 Controlling Multiple DSP Devices describes the method of controlling multiple devices Section 14 5 3 Multiple DSP Emulator Display describes display of device output in the multiple device environment 14 5 1 Allocation and Initialization of Multiple Devices Most of the higher level emulator functions require a device index as one of the parameters The emulator uses the device index to select a previously allocated DSP structure The DSP struct
92. trace one instruction in the Trace mode The STEP command arms the trace counter with the count instructions to be executed in real time before re entering the Debug mode of operation and displaying the enabled registers and memory 13 46 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc SYSTEM Execute Operating System Commands Example 13 38 STEP Command Command Explanation t Step one instruction at the current target DSP address and display enabled step registers and memory blocks step 50 Execute hex 50 instructions and then display the enabled registers and memory blocks step 3 li Step over the next 3 source lines for a source file associated with the current program counter step dv2 5 5 Execute 5 instructions on target DSP addresses 2 and 5 simultaneously and display the enabled registers and memory blocks of each when they have each completed their 5 instructions 13 40 STREAMS Enable Disable Handling of I O for C Programs STREAMS dev_num ENABLE DISABLE The STREAMS command is used to enable and disable the handling of input and output on the host side for C programs By default it is enabled When enabled all input and output that is done in the C program running on the DSP is handled on the host side So for example when an fopen call is made in the C program running on the
93. 0 XO File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP56300 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits DSP56600 XO File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP56800 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP96000 RO File Number in the upper 16 bits count in the lower 16 bits 2 Write to the appropriate registers a designator that indicates the memory space and address from where you want the data to be read Designate the memory space as follows 0 p l x 2 y 3 l Device Designate the Put the address from where Family memory space in the data will be read in register register DSP56000 RI RO DSP56100 RI RO DSP56300 RI RO Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 41 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc PATH Define File Directory Path DSP56600 RI RO DSP56800 RI RO DSP96000 R2 RI 3 Place a DEBUG instruction at an appropriate address in your program This is the point in the program where you want the data transfer to take place For more information see the Examples of How to Assign an Output File Once the registers are set and the DEBUG instruction written you can open the output file OUTPUT Command Examples Table 13 4 OUTPUT Command Command Explanation output Display all output files currently open for all target devices output dv2 p 300 admout Open fi
94. 100 R0 begin writing data at address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 3 4 DSP56600 Family The input file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 16 bit register Indicate these by writing the File Number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 8 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 0 P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 6 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56600 Family Operation Comment MOVE S030c X0 input from file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE 100 R0 begin writing data at address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode Motorola Inputand Output Files 69 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Input File 6 3 5 DSP56800 Family The input file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 16 bit register Indicate these by writing the File Number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 8 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 0 P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 7 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56800 Family Operation Comment MOVE S030c X0 input from file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE 100 R0 begin writing data at address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X
95. 11 6 Device BION sxe E ANS E ee ares VERN ti Repeat BUUOM iS ee oats hee ng wh we ee Xe as we oes ee 11 8 Reset Button Asa Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 13 12 13 13 13 14 13 15 13 16 13 17 13 18 13 19 13 20 13 21 13 22 13 23 13 24 13 25 13 26 13 27 vi Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 12 Displayed Information Displayme the Radio ladra a a ti 12 1 Display the Current Break poms A A Eee Wey oo ees 12 2 Command Window rico rt ae ee eae eee 12 3 Session VOWS A ds rs ee beled Mee a 12 4 Assembly WVINIO Ws a6 exists iuis E DS een iy 12 7 Source Window 45 0 mipira Reena G ide BK eae ROE Sas REO PERS AAA 12 8 Stack WING OW esoneri date Weta II me Mea at ds 12 9 Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference Entering Commands cse eiee e a AA 13 4 Command Syntaks seeriana a AN a Bik EE 13 5 Command Parameters List of Abbreviations oooo ooooooooo ooo 13 6 ASM Single Line Interactive Assembler 0 0020 momo 13 8 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints 0 0000 13 10 CCHANGE Change Command Converter Memory 13 15 CDISPLAY Display Command Converter Flags and Memory 13 16 CFORCE Assert Reset or Break on Command Converter 13 16 CGO Execute ONCE Sequence si palaces gy is 13 17 CLOAD
96. 13 54 13 55 13 56 13 57 13 58 13 59 winput 13 55 wlist 13 55 wmemory 13 56 working directory 2 2 2 4 4 3 4 4 woutput 13 56 wregister 13 57 Index 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Motorola
97. 2 0405 SA IA AA ARA RS EA COCO rta AI A AAA HOST Commands ia A E Da are er ha en ee HELP C mmand A a Hehe SUS NAAA a Ne Examples of Input File Data ipods da INPUT COMMAND Examples of Terminal Input Within an Input File LIS TE Commands ba ADE AR A eRe ATA For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com xiii 13 29 13 30 13 31 13 32 13 34 13 33 13 35 13 36 13 37 13 39 13 38 13 40 13 42 13 41 13 43 13 44 13 45 13 46 13 47 13 48 13 49 13 50 13 51 13 52 13 53 13 54 13 55 13 57 13 56 13 58 13 59 13 60 13 61 13 62 14 1 14 2 xiv Freescale Semiconductor Inc EGAD Command 240246528 bapa die o taba egd os 13 37 BOG Command asan tusan t aa eek a uN eS Dea a ee 13 38 MORE Command ans pra dr ricas bid be REA i pinia 13 39 NEXT COMAS A A A A AA 13 39 QUIT Command sre siea EA A anes 13 43 PATH GC Oman a AI BO Se aed Dae MOA AS 13 43 RADIX Command einga tu Aia A a ale hae 13 44 REDIRECT Command os ida sata eee suis een Sees A eR Ose eA Sees 13 45 SAVE Command 2245345528 mariene eed ROPES GRR 4 PIRES 13 46 STREAMS Command Tese 443 464 S amii aN See een PaaS 13 47 STEF COM MAM AAA AAA A ee 13 47 SYSTEM Command rossner tn til bd 13 48 TYPE COMAS AAA RARA 13 49 TRACE Command 55x 6 ce By ad alos geet 13 49 UNLOCK Command aise GAG oe PAA a RAGA eae eS 13 50 RINT Command ak oh eur AAA Pl od SRE RE SRS 13 50 UP Commanded a co dens eG ahs oe aed dea ete he Rha aac tes 13 51 VIEW Comm
98. 4 buffer to hold read values devn 0 set device number dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 read_memtyp DSP_CC_XMEM set memory space read _addr 0x00401 start address read_length 551 and block length now read the memory block into read_store status dsp_cc_rmem_blk devn read_memtyp read_addr read_length read_store 14 34 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 33 dsp_cc_wmem Write Command Converter Memory include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int dsp_cc_wmem device mtype address value int device Command Converter affected by command enum memory_map mtype Memory space to write unsigned long address Address of location to write unsigned long value Source location for value to write dsp_cc_wmem writes one location in the Command Converter device memory space mt ype address address using the value in the location pointed to by value Valid values for mt ype are e DSP_CC_YMEM e DSP_CC_XMEM e DSP_CC_PMEM The return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 33 Example 14 33 dsp_cc_wmem Write to a location in Command Converter memory include sim
99. 4 13 45 13 46 13 50 13 56 allocate 14 46 allocation 14 28 14 29 deallocate 14 40 get map index 14 37 load 14 31 14 43 load state 14 44 read 14 12 14 21 14 33 14 34 14 48 14 49 write 14 15 14 17 14 25 14 29 14 35 14 36 14 39 14 55 modify 5 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 monitor 8 4 more 13 39 move 8 1 8 2 multiple devices 14 68 device index 14 58 halting 14 61 N next 3 6 3 7 11 4 13 39 non display emulation library file 14 64 library restrictions 14 64 loading program code 14 65 number system 7 5 7 6 nwads 14 64 O object files 13 36 OMF 4 5 4 7 13 36 13 37 13 45 13 46 open 13 53 13 54 13 55 13 56 13 57 13 58 operating system 13 47 13 48 operators 10 7 10 8 10 9 output 6 1 6 3 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 9 2 12 4 12 5 12 6 13 40 13 41 13 42 13 45 13 47 13 56 13 57 Motorola P page 13 39 parameters 13 6 password 13 50 path 2 2 2 3 2 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 13 42 13 43 pathname 13 42 13 43 pause 3 24 point 8 1 8 2 position 7 3 preferences 7 8 Q quit 13 43 R radix 7 5 7 6 12 1 13 44 redirect 8 6 13 44 13 45 registers 5 2 5 3 10 3 13 44 13 50 13 57 get index 14 38 read 14 20 14 22 14 50 write 14 24 14 26 14 57 repeat 11 7 reset 2 2 7 7 11 8 13 28 13 29 result 13 49 RTS 13 28 S save 4 5 4 6 4 7 13 45 13 46 screen buffer 14 63 Screen management functions 14 60 scrmgr c 14 69 scroll 13 39 session 9 2 12 4 12 5
100. 4 Click OK Device and debugger configurations is also discussed in Section 7 3 Changing the Radix on page 7 5 To copy memory from the command line see Section 13 15 COPY Copy a Memory Block on page 13 21 Motorola Managing Memory and Registers 5 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Disassembling Code Stored in Memory 5 7 Disassembling Code Stored in Memory You can disassemble instructions that have been stored in memory This allows you to review DSP object code in its assembly language mnemonic format Invalid opcodes are disassembled to a define constant DC mnemonic 5 7 1 To Disassemble Code Stored in Memory 1 From the Display menu choose Disassemble then select Memory Block The dialog box in Figure 5 8 appears Disassemble Memory Ea Memory Space gt yl Start Address End Address Cancel Figure 5 8 Disassemble Memory Dialog Box In the drop down list select the Memory Space that you want to disassemble Under Start Address type the address where you want to begin to disassemble Under End Address type in the address where you want to stop disassembling Click OK View the Session window You will see the mnemonics of the memory block that you specified Nn mr BW N More information about disassembly see Section 7 3 Changing the Radix on page 7 5 and Section 9 2 Logging Output from the Session
101. 4 71 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 83 3 4 3 5 3 6 34 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 5 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc List of Tables ADS Command Converter Switches 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 1 5 Software Breakpoint Actions 0 0 2 0 cece eee ene ee 2 13 Hardware Breakpoint Actions dio say ath a eee Da he eee 2 17 Software Breakpoint Actions 0 c cece eee ee ee eee 3 11 Software Breakpoints DEBUGcc Available on the DSP56000 DSP56100 DSP56300 and DSP56600 3 13 Software Breakpoints FDEBUGcc Available on the DSP96002 3 15 Hardware Breakpoint Actions 000 ce eee ee eee eee eee 3 18 DSP56000 Device Family Hardware Breakpoint Types 3 20 DSP56100 Device Family Hardware Breakpoint Types 3 20 DSP56300 Device Family Hardware Breakpoint Types 3 20 DSP56600 Family Hardware Breakpoint Types 3 21 DSP56800 Family Hardware Breakpoint Types 3 21 DSP96000 Family Hardware Breakpoint Types 3 21 ETS O Operators iris 3 23 Sample P Memory Address Locations oo ooo ooocoooomcoomoom 5 5 Input File Numbers for Specific Suite56 DSP Devices 6 5 Input File Memory Space and Destination Register 6 5
102. 53 14 54 14 55 14 56 14 57 14 58 14 59 14 60 14 61 14 62 14 63 14 64 14 65 14 66 14 67 xvi Freescale Semiconductor Inc O sian tc choad eG es BGG eeh ewes oh hea GhG ee ios athe dle ted 14 40 dsp free INEM 3434929 Sas petite Pate es Ve ahs Shae tia acts 14 41 dsp POU daa sde pones edad pibe 14 41 dspurora dress das 14 42 0 AAA ee eR eee laa ae E EE 14 43 SE TUL 5 3 ot Sede Sse eR ee OID Sec Beek RG Heed SA RRO 14 43 A taka ee eiaes eee wha ERs See Ag REN 14 44 dsp load Gern oaks AA eee ah AR ea See ee eS 14 44 GSO NEW O OOO 14 45 dsp ER EIA 14 46 asprrcall a AI es 14 47 dsparesel caceria nl 14 47 ONPE ii RA AAA AAA DA RA A 14 48 dsp rmen BUR ara an 14 49 ASPAS DA ES Goa 14 50 A O EE hen ea oka ie 14 51 dsp spath isa nin wees 14 52 USPUSTARLU Ps toes peed Say ape Bh ore as wi tea ie ENEE KE AA 14 52 CSP status 3 tada dr aa ida cds 14 53 dspustepllua darlo O a 14 54 SPESOPO A A A ASS ART A AS AR 14 54 dsp unlocks car ia NA RS 14 55 GSP WME ere ri E AER A NE a 14 56 dsp wmem DK a EI TO EAS Ms 14 57 GSP Wreg aras poi E a 14 58 sim O A uaa Ge yaaa pig tia are Per y acd 14 59 Sim geMmemd suis osas 14 59 sim etend es vale One eat as 14 60 Device Structures Creation mesi arcada Cae a Mee hee os 14 65 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 1 Introduction Motorola s Suite56 DSP Application D
103. 6 3 20 3 21 13 10 13 13 13 14 13 15 13 28 13 53 breakpoint 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 16 2 17 2 18 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 22 12 2 13 50 13 53 continue 14 67 testing 14 58 14 66 breakpoints 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 3 16 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 22 12 2 13 10 13 11 13 12 13 13 13 52 button 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 C C functions 8 4 C source code 8 1 call stack 8 3 12 9 chain 7 3 change 7 5 7 6 13 31 13 32 cld 14 44 14 66 close 13 43 13 53 13 54 13 55 13 56 13 57 13 58 cmd 14 59 COFF 4 5 13 36 13 37 13 45 command converter flag word 14 11 14 14 monitor revision 14 32 Motorola reset 14 31 command entry command line editing 14 60 expansion 14 60 macro file 14 58 14 59 terminal 14 58 14 60 14 61 command execution macro file 14 58 14 59 trace mode 14 63 Command Window 12 3 12 4 13 54 commands 9 1 9 2 12 3 13 38 13 47 13 48 13 54 system 14 62 14 63 comment from dspt_masm 14 27 configure 7 2 constants 10 6 copy 5 7 count 13 51 CTRL C 14 61 D data 13 32 13 33 13 34 13 35 13 40 13 41 13 42 debugging 8 1 10 4 decimal 13 44 default 7 4 device 6 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 11 6 13 50 device mode 14 23 14 37 directories 4 1 directory 2 2 2 3 2 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 13 42 13 43 disable 3 22 8 5 disassemble 5 8 display 2 8 8 7 10 10 12 1 12 2 13 36 13 39 13 51 13 54 13 55 display support 14 1 divide 10 7 down 8 1
104. 6 Executing Instructions with GO aiii a ae aap ie 2 19 Executing Instructions with Gosia enone a hee 3 2 Step Through Program Instructions 0 00 cece eee eee 3 4 Trace Programi Execution cross a naa 3 5 Executing the Next Program Instruction 0 00 00000 3 6 Providing an Until Condo ir ers nee q Goes omen es 3 8 Setting a Software Breakpoint 4 5 vss saie vas ses dase wes Ve aos 3 10 Setting a Hardware Breakpoint ms Dita 3 17 Disable Breakpoints Dialog Box na ee Sede Vals eae eee ae 3 22 Displaying Current Paths 2 An 4 1 Setting the Working Directory Path oir bs 4 2 Saving a CORE eld Files es S205 OA AR AA AA A 4 6 Open Register Window Dialog Box 0 6 66 c cece eee 5 2 Displaying the Register Values 0 4464048 ino a 5 2 Changing the Value of Registers iia Ware we eds ewe A 5 3 Open Memory Window Dialog Box 0 00 c cee eee 5 4 Displaying Memory Values oo2 044046 4 004 rat ta 5 4 Changing the Value in Memory ose sili 5a be A enn es 5 6 Copy Memory Dialog BOX ss 34 saves A shoe RR A en oe 5 7 Disassemble Memory Dialog Box 0 0 0 e cee eee eee 5 8 Add Watch Expression to Window Dialog Box 04 5 9 Providing Input Data cir al 6 6 Creating an Output Pile voir di 6 12 Setting the Configuration of a Device oo oooooccccooccnonocco oo 7 2 Setting the Default Device sched ss oi an dd 7 4 xi For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 7 5
105. 6000 R2 Ri 3 Place a DEBUG instruction at an appropriate address in your program This is the point in the program where you want the data transfer to take place Once the registers are set and the DEBUG instruction written you can assign the input file with the INPUT command Command Examples Example 13 25 INPUT Command Command Explanation input Displays the currently open input files for the current device input dv2 p 200 data io Opens data io file for input to device 2 Note p 200 is the address where the DEBUG instruction resides input dv2 off Closes all current input data files assigned to device 2 input dv1 3 Displays the filename of Input File Number 3 for Device 1 input p 400 data io rf Opens the file data io for input to the default device in fractional radix Note p 400 is the address where the DEBUG instruction resides input p 600 term Creates a input file called term The file number defaults to the next available consecutive number Note p 600 is the address where the DEBUG instruction resides The Debugger provides a way to specify repeated input values and sequences very similar to the DSP Simulator A single data value may be repeated by specifying count following the data item A group of data items may be indicated by enclosing the group in parentheses The entire group may then be repeated by placing count immediately following the closing parenthesis The paren
106. 6001 x51 234 provide password for device dsp_new devn 56001 Create structures for protected device type 14 2 61 dsp_wmem Write DSP Memory Location include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h dsp_wmem device_index memory_map address value int device_index DSP device to be affected by command enum memory_map memory_map memory designator unsigned long address DSP memory address to write unsigned long value Pointer to value to write to memory location dsp_wmem writes a selected DSP memory location The memory_map parameter selects the appropriate dt_memory structure from dt_var mem for the selected device These structures are described in the simdev h file which is included with the emulator The memory_map parameter can be obtained with the function dsp_findmem by using the memory name as a key Use the emulator help mem command for a list of valid memory names Valid memory_map values are memory_map_ concatenated with a valid memory name As an example memory_map_ pa refers to off chip pa memory on the 96002 device Motorola Library Functions 14 55 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions If the selected memory map requires two word values the least significant word should be at the value location and the most significant word at the value 1 locat
107. 8 2 13 51 dsp_alloc 14 28 14 29 dsp_cc_fmem 14 29 dsp_cc_go 14 30 dsp_cc_Idmem 14 31 dsp_cc_reset 14 31 dsp_cc_revision 14 32 dsp_cc_rmem 14 33 dsp_cc_rmem_blk 14 34 dsp_cc_wmem 14 35 dsp_cc_wmem_blk 14 36 dsp_check_service_request 14 37 14 53 Index 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc dsp_findmem 14 37 dsp_findreg 14 8 14 38 dsp_fmem 14 39 dsp_free 14 40 dsp_free_mem 14 40 dsp_go 14 41 dsp_go_address 14 42 dsp_go_reset 14 42 dsp_init 14 43 dsp_Idmem 14 43 dsp_load 14 44 dsp_new 14 10 14 45 14 65 dsp_path 14 45 dsp_realloc 14 46 dsp_reset 14 47 dsp_rmem 14 48 dsp_rmem_blk 14 49 dsp_rreg 14 8 14 50 dsp_save 14 50 dsp_spath 14 51 dsp_startup 14 52 dsp_status 14 53 dsp_step 14 53 dsp_stop 14 54 dsp_unlock 14 55 dsp_wmem 14 55 dsp_wreg 14 57 dspd_break 14 9 dspd_cc_architecture 14 10 dspd_cc_read_flag 14 11 dspd_cc_read_memory 14 12 dspd_cc_reset 14 13 dspd_cc_revision 14 13 dspd_cc_write_flag 14 14 dspd_cc_write_memory 14 15 dspd_check_service_request 14 16 dspd_fill memory 14 17 dspd_go 14 18 dspd_jtag_reset 14 19 dspd_read_core_registers 14 20 14 22 dspd_read_memory 14 21 dspd_read_once_registers 14 20 14 22 dspd_reset 14 23 dspd_status 14 23 dspd_write_core_registers 14 24 dspd_write_memory 14 25 dspd_write_once_registers 14 26 dspt_masm_xxxxx 14 27 dspt_unasm_xxxxx 14 28 E enable 3 22 8 5 evaluat
108. 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc TYPE Display the Result Type of a C Expression mode of operation so that the instruction pipeline may be restored and any result of the traced instruction and subsequent instructions update the pipeline and machine state Note The address of the instruction that is to be traced is in the OnCE Program Address Bus Decode Register OPABD If the program counter is changed before a TRACE or STEP command is issued the address of the program counter register will point to the instruction to be traced When single stepping through the BRKcc instruction and the condition is true the instruction immediately following the BRKcc instruction is displayed by the ADS but is be executed Instead the DSP correctly executes the instruction at LA 1 Single stepping a Tcc REPcc or REP instruction with initial loop counter equal to zero may cause incorrect DSP operation The main difference between the TRACE and STEP commands is the OnCE port trace counter is armed to trace one instruction in the Trace mode The STEP command arms the trace counter with the count instructions to be executed in real time before re entering the Debug mode of operation and displaying enabled registers and memory Example 13 41 TRACE Command Command Explanation trace Execute one instruction and display the enabled regis
109. A count_core buf_core 14 20 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 16 dspd_read_memory Read Memory Block from DSP Device include simcom h include driver h int dspd_read_memory device_index mem_space address count value int device_index Index of DSP device affected by command int mem_space Memory space to read unsigned long address Address of first location to read unsigned long count Number of locations to read unsigned long value Pointer to area to receive memory values CT CT dspd_read_memory reads count words of memory from the DSP device in memory space mem_space Starting at address address and stores them in the memory pointed to by value Valid values for mem_space are e P_MEM program memory e X_MEM X data memory e Y_MEM Y data memory The return value is set to DSP_OK if the operation succeeds DSP_ERROR if it fails See Example 14 16 Example 14 16 dspd read memory Read DSP memory block include simcom h include driver h int devn status unsigned long x_ mem buf 0x100 devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 Read back work buffer status dspd_read_mem
110. A expansion slot e Addresses free I O addresses 100 102 hex or 200 202 hex or 300 302 hex 1 2 2 Hewlett Packard Requirements An HP workstation should meet the following minimum requirements e HP workstation running HP UX Version 9 x 10 x is not supported e Hard drive with 12 Mbytes of free space e Mouse and keyboard e One EISA expansion slot 1 2 3 Sun Workstation Requirements A Sun workstations should meet the following minimum requirements e SUN Operating System Release 4 1 1 or later or SOLARIS Release 5 1 or later e Hard drive with 12 Mbytes of free space e Mouse and keyboard e One Sbus expansion slot 1 3 Specifying a Command Converter Depending on the ADS that you using you may have several options for the type of command converter that you use The type of command converter that you are using must be indicated when you launch the ADS Debugger software You indicate the type of command converter by including certain switches with the command that starts the ADS Debugger software If you do not properly specify the type of command converter the ADS Debugger software will not be able to communicate with the target board ADM 1 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Specifying a Command Converter Table 1 1 ADS Command Converter Switches Type of Command Operati
111. ANGE Change Command Converter Memory Examples of BREAK on DSP devices with JTAG OnCE Ports break r xa gt x 104 and lt x 110 Halt DSP program execution on default target DSP when a read access of X memory address range 105 to 109 occurs 1 time break rw pa p 104 or p 110 Halt DSP program execution on default target DSP when a read or write access of program memory address 104 or 110 occurs one time 13 6 CCHANGE Change Command Converter Memory CCHANGE dev_list FLAG XPTR YPTR address _block expression The CCHANGE command allows you to examine or modify the memory of the OnCE Command Converter P X or Y data memory spaces of the DSP56002 This command is useful if you wish to design and debug OnCE command sequences The XPTR is Command Converter x memory location 4 and is used to point to the x memory area where values read from the target OnCE are to be stored The YPTR is Command Converter x memory location 2 and is used to point to the y memory area where sequences are to start from when issuing a CGO command Note that the Command Converter X memory addresses 0 to 7F hex are reserved for use by the Command Converter monitor These locations should not be changed For more details on the usage of these locations refer to the monitor program source listing P memory locations 0 to 1B0 hex are reserved for the monitor which is boot loaded from the Command Converter EPROM Example 13 2 Examples of the CChange Com
112. BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints If the expression is false program execution continues Real time execution of is not affected See Using Expressions in Breakpoints for more information The optional parameter count represents the number of times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before performing the action For example if you set the count to 3 the breakpoint will be triggered the third time that the breakpoint is encountered Real time execution will not be affected if you indicate a Count The optional parameter action indicates the action to be taken when the breakpoint is triggered If no action is provided Halt will be assumed as the default Possible actions are H Halt Stops program execution when the breakpoint is encountered N Note Displays the breakpoint expression in the Session window each time it is true Program execution continues The display in the Session window is not updated until program execution stops S Show Displays the enabled register memory set Program execution continues In Increment Increments the CNTn counter by one where n equals 1 2 or 3 Table 13 3 Examples of BREAK on DSP devices with OnCE or JTAG OnCE Ports Command Explanation break Display all currently enabled breakpoints for all target DSPs break dv2 Display currently enabled breakpoints for target DSP address 2 break off Disable all currently enabled breakpoints for the default target
113. CC_XMEM and DSP_CC_PMEM The return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 34 Example 14 34 dsp _cc wmem_bl1k Write several locations from Command Converter memory include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int devn status enum memory_map write _memtyp memory space to write unsigned long write_addr address of first location to write write _length number of locations to write write _store 1024 buffer holding values to write devn 0 set device number dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 write _memtyp DSP_CC_XMEM set memory space write addr 0x00401 start address write _length 551 and block length now write the memory block to device 0 status dsp_cc_wmem_blk devn write _memtyp write _addr write _length write_store 14 36 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 35 dsp_check_service_request Check for Service Request include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_check_service_request device_index int device_index device affected by operation dsp_check_service_request checks to see if the target device device_index is requesting service from the host computer th
114. Command Explanation watch ro Add register rO to the watch list watch x 0 Add x 0 to the watch list watch Add the given C expression to the watch list count 1 S total watch h count 2 Add the given C expression to the watch list with display radix hex watch b flag Add the given C variable to the watch list with display radix binary watch r0 x 0 Add the expression r0 x 0 to the watch list 13 52 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WBREAKPOINT GUI Breakpoint Window Example 13 48 WATCH Command Command Explanation watch Display the watch list watch 3 off Remove item number three from the watch list watch off Remove all items from the watch list 13 50 WASM GUI Assembly Window WASM dev_list OFF WASM is a GUI command that opens an assembly window Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 49 WASM Command wasm Open an assembly window for the current device wasm dv0 1 Open an assembly window for devices dv0 and dv1 wasm off Close the assembly window or the current device 13 51 WBREAKPOINT GUI Breakpoint Window WBREAKPOINT dev_list OFF WBREAKPOINT is a GUI command that opens a breakpoint window Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs E
115. DSP device index to be affected by command char command_string User interface command to be executed sim_docmd executes any emulator command that the emulator normally accepts from the terminal ADSDSP normally calls sim_gtcmd to get a valid command string from the terminal then calls sim_docmd to execute it The device_index determines which DSP device in a multiple DSP emulation is affected by the command execution The devices are numbered 0 1 2 n 1 in an n device system so be very careful for example to use 0 for the device_index parameter in a single device system If the command_st ring begins macro execution the selected device structure in_macro flag will be set by sim_docmd ADSDSP retrieves valid commands from the macro file by calling sim_gmcmd as long as the in_macro flag is set The commands are still executed by sim_docmd whether they come from the terminal or a macro file Some commands initiate device execution such as go or trace The target executes until execution of a breakpoint or the completion of the requested number of instruction steps See Example 14 64 14 58 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 64 sim_docmd Use sim_docmd to execute device 0 from address P 40 to breakpoint at P 80 include simcom h include pro
116. Figure 7 1 Setting the Configuration of a Device 2 Under Device select the number of the device that you want to configure 3 Under Configure select whether you are designating the Type of the device whether it is to be enabled or disabled by indicating On or Off or indicate that you want to Remove the device from being part of your target system At least one device must be activated at all times the last device cannot be removed 4 Under Device Type select the appropriate device type 7 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc To Set the Configuration of a Device 5 Under Command Converter select the command converter to which the device is connected The ADS supports up to eight command converters on a single development host Each command converter supports one JTAG chain which can serve up to twenty four devices 6 Under TMS Chain select the TMS Test Module Select line that controls this device 7 Under Position in TMS Chain select the position that the device occupies in the JTAG chain The device connected directly to TDO from the command converter is pos0 8 Click OK The Debugger provides the flexibility for you to define external memory responses by supplying the C language source code for the external memory functions The source code used as a default is contained in the file simvmem c By changing memory val
117. Freescale Semiconductor Inc Suite56 Application Development System ADS Debugger User Manual Release 6 3 DSPADSUM D Document Rev 4 0 07 1999 DSP 9111990 LSP Development lols AA MOTOROLA For More Information On This Product o to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Suite56 OnCe and MFAX are trademarks of Motorola Inc Motorola reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein Motorola makes no warranty representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose nor does Motorola assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit and specifically disclaims any and all liability including without limitation consequential or incidental damages Typical parameters which may be provided in Motorola data sheets and or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time All operating parameters including Typicals must be validated for each customer application by customer s technical experts Motorola does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others Motorola products are not designed intended or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body or other applications intended to support life or for any other application in which the failure of the Motorola product could
118. Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 1 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 13 12 13 13 13 14 13 15 13 17 13 16 13 18 13 19 13 21 13 20 13 22 13 24 13 23 13 26 13 25 13 27 13 28 Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc List of Examples ADS Switches for Command Converters 0 00 eee ee eee Repeating Data Valitessois dba Packages Mairead a Rada User CommMm nt erre ione ae eae ie BA SAE oe RR RED eRe AR dada Input Data Values to Memory aici sats A aaa wets ASM Commands s ART ARA RARA Examples of the CChange Command 0 0 0 c cece o CDISP LAY Conadi IA CTORCE CONTO Sve iwi hea tt Shek oud a a r ES CO COMING sin EA akin ata AS ee ek ware AAA CLOAD Command secsi ind dG tials AAA AE ons CSAVE Command ia adie Vee heed a aed aes CSTEP COMME OSES CSTEP Command in a Macro 654 448k da dc CP RACE AC Ornate ss oy pcs eet We aed ea eA pega Ae eee ee CTRACE Command in a Mact0i 4 2s vicp ae cavers ae eee ree ad bees CHANGE Command ss oaks AAA Side Ried Wee ees COPY Commandos ir eis aa ee he 8 DEVICE Command rr PA Pek Sera G4 Pack aw ales 4 da hess DISASSEMBLE Command 00 c cece cece nent eeeeenee DOWN Commande iss cui A Suen Fe eas lew nas Rc ADA bes DISPLAY Command 44 3 22 eta taar GREG SARA GRACO AAS OARS EVALUATE Command CA b54 assed SPW SOG SA wey PN ae we FINISH Command rs ar Bee FRAME Commande ds e e a FORGE Command
119. MAX devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 count_once 15 count_core ADSCOREMAX status dspd_read_once_registers devn OSCR count_once buf_once status dspd_read_core_regist rs devn ADS_A count_core buf_core 14 22 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 18 dspd_reset Reset DSP Device to Debug or User Mode include simcom h include driver h int dspd_reset device_index reset_mode int device_index Index of affected DSP device int reset_mode type of reset to perform dspd_reset resets the target device device_index The device may be reset into debug mode or user mode based on the value of reset_mode Valid values for reset_mode are e DSP_RESET_DEBUG teset device into debug mode e DSP_RESET_USER treset device into user mode The function returns DSP_OK on success DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 18 Example 14 18 dspd_reset Place DSP device 3 into debug mode include simcom h include driver h int devn status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dspd_reset devn DSP_RESET_DEBUG Reset device into DEBUG mode 14 2 19 dspd_sta
120. Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints Keep in mind that a C expression that refers to C variables can only be evaluated in the context in which the watch is established That is the variables in the expression are only valid while they are in scope If one of the variables in an expression goes out of scope either because a function call or return from a function the value is replaced with the message Expression out of scope When all elements of the expression are back in scope the value is again displayed An expression that has gone out of scope because of a function call can be evaluated and displayed by selecting the stack frame for the evaluation context The stack frame assignment remains in effect only until the next instruction is executed An expression that is out of scope because of a function exit cannot be evaluated until the function is again invoked since the expression s variables no longer exist For more information about watch lists see section 8 1 Moving Up and Down the Call Stack section 10 7 Setting Up and Modifying a Watch list on page 10 10 section 12 1 Displaying the Radix on page 12 1 and section 13 49 WATCH Set Modify View or Clear Watch Item on page 13 52 2 6 Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints Software breakpoints are used to specify that a particu
121. More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 29 dsp_cc_ reset reset Command Converter include simcom h include protocom h int devn status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dsp_cc_reset devn reset the Command Converter for device 0 Pi 14 2 30 dsp_cc_revision Read Command Converter Monitor Revision include simcom h include protocom h int dspd_cc_revision device_index revstring int device_index Command Converter affected by command char revstring receives CC monitor revision string dsp_cc_revision interrogates the Command Converter device_index to determine the monitor revision and returns a formatted string in revst ring containing the monitor revision The format used to create the revstring 1s Command Converter monitor revision 4 2f The return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 30 Example 14 30 dsp _cc revision obtain Command Converter monitor revision number include simcom h include protocom h int devn status char revision_string 80 devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dspd_cc_revision devn revision_string 14 32 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More In
122. Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 14 Library Functions The ADSDSP emulator package includes several libraries of functions which were used to build the emulator These libraries allow the user to build his own customized emulator and integrate it with his unique project The source code for many of the ADSDSP functions is provided including the code for the main entry point the code for the terminal I O functions and example code for a non display version of the emulator The source code can be modified to create an emulator customized for a particular application A custom emulator may be built with or without display support Omitting display support reduces the program size by about half but sacrifices the screen output facilities used in the ADS omitting the display also sacrifices the user interface and command parsing and execution routines which rely on the display routines A non display ADS may be used to provide direct program control of the hardware by calling the low level routines creating reports and activity logs using standard C functions Omitting display support does not preclude the use of the standard C input output functions or the creation of an alternative user interface The rest of the chapter covers various aspects of the specification and use of the libraries e Section 14 1 ADS Object Library Files lists and groups the function
123. N 1 For more information see section 3 6 Software Breakpoints and section 3 9 Types of Hardware Breakpoints Motorola Controlling Execution 3 15 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Hardware Breakpoints 3 8 Hardware Breakpoints Hardware breakpoints are used to specify that a particular action be taken whenever a certain condition is met In this way hardware breakpoints are very similar to software breakpoints However there are some differences Hardware breakpoints e use the OnCE circuitry on the device e can break on the execution of an instruction can be set in ROM or RAM e can be set to detect an access of data memory Although hardware breakpoints are more flexible than software breakpoints you will want to use hardware breakpoints judiciously In effect only one hardware breakpoint can be enabled at any time 3 8 1 To Set a Hardware Breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Set Hardware The dialog box in Figure 3 7 appears 3 16 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Hardware Breakpoints Set Breakpoint Ed Type First Condition Action Type Access Address Qualifier E Halt Note mE C Read Equal El C White C Not
124. Output File 13 33 OUTPUT Assign Output File OUTPUT dev_list file number OFF OUTPUT dev_list file number address filename TERM rd rf rh ru o a c The OUTPUT command opens disk files that will accept data from the target DSP The optional parameter dev_list represents the device or list of devices on which the command will be performed The optional parameter file number represents the number to assign to an output file or if referencing an existing file the number that has been assigned to an output file The optional parameter OFF closes the output file designated by file number If no file number is indicated all open output files are closed The address parameter is required when opening an output file This address represents the address where the DEBUG instruction which will trigger the data transfer resides To open an output file you must use the OUTPUT command with either the filename parameter or the TERM parameter If a file currently exists with the filename specified with the filename parameter you will be prompted for an action of either appending the data to the file overwriting the file or aborting the command The selection of the file action may be included in the command line using the o overwrite a append or the c cancel flag This is useful when executing macro command files The TERM parameter assigns the output to the display terminal rather than a file The in
125. SP96002 Device Family The DSP96002 recognizes the FDEBUGcc and the DEBUGcc opcode where ce represents a conditional code The FDEBUGcc opcode is used to indicate that the device should enter into the debug mode if the specified floating point conditional code cc is true See the DSP96002 User s Manual for more information on the FDEBUGcc opcode and the DEBUGcc opcode 3 14 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Types of Software Breakpoints Table 3 3 Software Breakpoints FDEBUGcc Available on the DSP96002 ee Meaning Condition Code Bit s eg equal Ke err error UNCC or SNAN or OPERR or OVF or UNF or DZ 1 ge greater or equal NAN or N and Z 0 gl greater or less than NAN or Z 0 gle greater less or equal NAN 0 gt greater than NAN or Z or N 0 inf infinity 1 le less or equal NAN or N or Z 0 lt less than NAN or Z or N 0 mi minus N 1 ne not equal Z 0 nge not greater or equal NAN or N and Z 1 ngl not greater or less NAN or Z 1 ngle not greater less or equal NAN 1 ngt not greater than NAN or Zor N 1 ninf not infinity 0 nle not less than or equal NAN or N or Z 1 nlt not less than NAN or Z or N 1 or ordered NAN 0 pl plus N 0 un unordered NA
126. U unsigned expression c_expression The EVALUATE command is used as a calculator for evaluating arithmetic expressions or for converting values from one radix to another The result of the expression evaluation is displayed in the specified radix If a radix is not specified in the EVALUATE command line the current default radix specified by the RADIX command will be used An expression consists of an arithmetic combination of operators and operands An operand may be a register name a memory location or a constant value For example A2 evaluates to the contents of register A2 To evaluate A2 as hexadecimal a dollar sign must precede the value The same holds for the values AO Al A2 BO B1 and B2 The order of evaluation of an expression s operators will be associated from left to right Parenthesis may be used to force the order of evaluation of the expression A more extensive discussion of the expressions which are valid for the EVALUATE command is in the DSP Assembler Reference Manual Section 3 The valid symbols for an expression are listed in the description of the BREAK command Example 13 18 EVALUATE Command Command Explanation evaluate rot p 50 Add the value in rO register to the value in program memory address hexadecimal 50 of the current default target DSP address and display the result using the default radix evaluate dv4 r0 p 1000 Add the value in rO register of target DSP address 4 to the value
127. Using a Watch List 2 5 Using a Watch List You can watch the contents of a specific memory location register or expression by setting up a watch list The watch list is updated every time program execution is stopped The expression that you watch can be valid even if it is not calculated during program execution C expressions can be used but must be enclosed in curly brackets c_expression Symbolic references may be used if symbols have been loaded from the object module To add an item to a watch list 1 From the Windows menu choose Watch The dialog box in Figure 2 5 appears Add Watch Expression To Window Ed Window Radix 1 Decimal Zi C Fractional Floating Ham C Hexadecimal C Unsigned Expression Default Cancel Apply Figure 2 5 Add Item to a Watch List 2 Under Window select the window number that you want to assign to the Watch window This is useful when you have more than one Watch window open 3 Under Expression type the expression that you want to appear in the Watch window 4 If the expression is a C expression enclose it in curly brackets c_expression 5 Under Radix select the radix format in which you want the variables displayed 6 Click OK The expression that you specified now appears in the Watch window if the expression you type is not valid you will get an error message explaining why the expression is not valid 2 10 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s
128. Window on page 9 2 To disassemble from the command line see Section 13 17 DISASSEMBLE Single Line Disassembler on page 13 24 5 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Using a Watch List 5 8 Using a Watch List You can watch the contents of a specific memory location register or expression by setting up a watch list The watch list is updated every time program execution is stopped The expression that you watch can be valid even if it is not calculated during program execution C expressions can be used but must be enclosed in curly brackets c_expression Symbolic references may be used if symbols have been loaded from the object module 5 8 1 To Add an Item to a Watch List 1 From the Windows menu choose Watch The dialog box in Figure 5 9 appears Add Watch Expression To Window x Window Radix C Decimal Fractional C Hoana Part Hexadecimal Unsigned Expression Default 1 J FT Cancel Apply Figure 5 9 Add Watch Expression to Window Dialog Box 2 Under Window select the window number that you want to assign to the Watch window This is useful when you have more than one Watch window open 3 Under Expression type the expression that you want to appear in the Watch window 4 Ifthe expression is a C expression enclose it in curly brackets c_expression 5 Unde
129. Y 3 L Table 6 16 Output File Assembly Code for DSP96000 Family Operation Comment MOVE S0003000c X0 output to file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE S100 RO write data from address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode For more information see section 6 4 Assigning an Output File 6 16 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 7 Debugger and Device Configurations You will want to make sure that you have specified a specific DSP configuration for each device The internal memory attributes are determined by the selected device configuration External memory access is also determined by the device configuration However the effects of writing external RAM ROM or peripherals can be totally controlled by you Motorola Debugger and Device Configurations 7 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc To Set the Configuration of a Device 7 1 To Set the Configuration of a Device 1 From the Modify menu select Device Then choose configure The dialog box in Figure 7 lappears Configure Device Ea Device m Configure e Type COn C pff C Remove r Device Configuration Device Type 58301 H Command Converter ccO gt TMS Chain Position in TMS Chain tmsO y pos y
130. a These four pieces of information are communicated by including these four elements in your program 1 A designation of the output file number and data length 2 a designation of the memory space to read from 3 the address to begin reading from and 4 a debug instruction The following code snippets demonstrate assembly code that you might use in your program to indicate these four elements Motorola Input and Output Files 6 13 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Output File 6 5 1 DSP56000 Family Output The output file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 24 bit register Indicate these by writing the file number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 16 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 0 P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 11 Ouput File Assembly Code for DSP56000 Family Operation Comment MOVE S03000c X0 output to file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE S100 RO write data from address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 5 2 DSP56100 Family Output First the output file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 16 bit register Indicate these by writing the File Number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 8 bits Then indicate the begin
131. a Debugger Command Reference 13 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc File O The following commands relate to file Input and Output These allow you to INPUT which allow you to INPUT peripheral or memory location values from a file OUTPUT peripheral or memory location values to a file LOAD DSP Assembler object module files or Debugger state files LOG Debugger commands session display output or DSP program execution profile and SAVE Debugger memory to an object module file or the Debugger state to a state file Execution Control The following commands relate to control of program execution These allow you to specify BREAK conditions GO until a break condition is met STEP a specified number of instructions or cycles before displaying register and memory changes TRACE a specified number of instructions or cycles displaying register and memory changes at each step The NEXT instruction operates essentially the same as the STEP instruction except that if the instruction being executed calls a subroutine or function execution continues until return from the subroutine or function The UNTIL instruction has the effect of setting a temporary breakpoint at a specified address executing until a breakpoint is en countered then clearing the temporary breakpoint The FINISH instruction proceeds until an RTS instruction is encountered for the current subroutine
132. about the finish command in Section 3 13 Allowing the Current Function to Finish on page 3 25 To use finish from the command line see Section 13 21 FINISH Step Until End of Current Subroutine on page 13 28 Motorola Debugger Toolbar 11 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Device Button 11 6 Device Button The Device button allows you to set the default device to which all commands will be directed See Figure 11 6 gim Hen pme gjel aeoe Pra Ey ha fa Cms Nge 2 yu Breall 2 p 000108 h dev b pr 9106 cyc 244 xe SHHHHHHMHHHHH y HHHHHHHHHHHH a aggggagenpnnnn b aapppppppppngd xI S HAHAHA xH SHHHHHH SHAH SH yieSHHMHMH yHeSHHHHHH AAA atm a2 9 at DDDDDD 34 agagad rs DDDDAA ns 9 o hys HH iS HAHAHA MHe HHHHHH AA nieces r2 abona rs iyo Figure 11 6 Device Button The Device button opens a dialog box that allows you to set the default device This designates the device to which all commands will be directed Notice that when you designate another device as the default device that the Session window and Command window automatically reflect information for the new device However other windows such as the Assembly window Source window Stack window etc must be specifically opened to reflect the information for the new default device You can find more information about the device command in Section 7 2
133. adecimal Unsigned C Binary Cancel Figure 7 3 Changing the Radix of Input 2 Note that the current default radix is automatically selected 3 Under Radix select the number system to use This system will be the default for values that you provide when performing commands 4 Click OK This change to the input radix does not affect the display radix of registers or memory Motorola Debugger and Device Configurations 7 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Changing the Radix 7 3 2 To Change the Radix in which to Display a Register or Memory Location 1 From the Modify menu choose Radix then select Set Display The dialog box in Figure 7 4 appears Set Radix x Radix Registers Memory C Decimal Memory Space Hexadecimal p Y C Fractional E Floating Point C Unsigned Start Address End Address Cancel Figure 7 4 Displaying a Register or Memory Locations 2 Under Radix select the number system to use 3 Under Registers select the register that will be displayed with the new radix To select more than one register hold down the CTRL key while single clicking on the register names 4 Under Memory select the memory space and addresses that will be displayed with the new radix 5 Click OK You have now changed the radix in which the selected registers and memory will be displayed This change to
134. am is redirected does not terminate the redirection It merely makes it ineffective until streams are enabled 8 5 1 To Redirect the I O Stream 1 From the File menu choose IO Redirect then select Streams The dialog box in Figure 8 5 appears Redirect 10 Stream x Stream STDIN C STDOUT STDERR File Name File R J gt l E Cancel Apply Figure 8 5 Redirecting the I O Stream 2 Under Stream select the type of stream that you want redirected STDIN STDOUT or STDERR 3 Under File Name specify the filename to redirect the stream or click on the File button to browse for the file 4 Click OK 8 5 2 To Stop Redirecting the Stream I O 1 From the File menu choose IO Streams then select Off 2 Select the type of stream to stop redirecting 3 Click OK 8 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Displaying the Type of a C Expression 8 5 3 To Display Redirected Stream I O 1 From the Display menu choose Redirected IO Streams 2 View the Session window The redirected stream will be listed with the filename to which the stream are being directed To redirect the stream I O from the command line see Section 13 37 REDIRECT Redirect stdin stdout stderr for C Programs on page 13 44 8 6 Displaying the Type of a C Expression You can display a C variable or expressio
135. an 2 p 000106 h dev b pe Gide cyc 244 xe HHHHHHHHHHHH y HHHHHHHHHHHH a aqgggagonpppnn b aqpppppppppnad xI SMHHHHM xH HHHHHH SHAH naM gt piso HAHAHA yHeSHHHHHH AAA am 32 aq at pppppp 39 aaqada rs DDDDAJ ns a hye HH iS HAHAHA SHAH A HAB nhai s ra tyops a rs fy Figure 11 8 Reset Button The Reset button resets the current device the same as if you had chosen Reset System from the Execute menu You can find more information about the reset command in Chapter 5 Managing Memory and Registers To use reset from the command line see Section 13 22 FORCE Assert RESET or BREAK on Target on page 13 28 11 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 12 Displayed Information This chapter shows you how to display the following information in the Debugger e Radix e Current breakpoint e Command window e Session window e Assembly window e Source window e Stack window 12 1 Displaying the Radix You can display the default radix number base that is currently used for command parameters and other values that you input That is the radix that is used when you type a value into a dialog box or at the command line To display the current default radix 1 From the Display menu choose Radix 2 The default radix is displayed in the Session window If the default radix for the Debugge
136. and is entered without a count Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 51 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WATCH Set Modify View or Clear Watch Item parameter the command will terminate only if the user types a key This instruction is useful when executing a macro file and the current display on the screen needs to be examined before executing further instructions from the macro file The B option causes a pause until all of the specified devices have entered the Debug mode This option is useful when executing a macro file where the devices must hit breakpoints or complete steps or traces before the next command is accepted Example 13 47 WAIT Command wait Wait for a key stroke from the keyboard before executing any further instructions wait 10 Wait ten seconds before executing another command from the keyboard wait dv0 3 b Wait until devices 0 1 2 and 3 have all entered the debug mode 13 49 WATCH Set Modify View or Clear Watch Item WATCH dev_list wn radix reg addr expression c_expression WATCH dev_list wn OFF The WATCH command is used to add modify view and clear watch items Watch items are on a watch list that gets displayed every time the user does a trace or a breakpoint is hit Additionally any time a user types WATCH without any parameters the watch list is displayed Example 13 48 WATCH Command
137. and sistur ys we pleat hs Gey a ried Ba NANG Spee ede ey seed 13 51 WATE Command aia tada ita Re 13 52 WATCH COMA Airis ian awe ede eles O eed as Saale 13 52 WASM Command ges te rieo RS eae bea eo Rae 13 53 WBREAKPOINT Command sanaa 000 cece cee eens 13 53 WCAELS Command vorian au alae a Bad lea aaa a ee T sien 13 54 WCOMMAND Command 0 0 ec eet eens 13 54 WHERE Command ass Aetna SS G8 ARAS OARS 13 54 MINPUT Command ssw yan yaa atau TA Ay Sey Ny anes 13 55 WEIS a Conrad ra 13 55 WOUTPUE Coma ssis ogia wa esca 13 56 WMEMORY Command slice ans ERA ARS ARAS 13 56 WREGISTER Command 0 00 ccc rnaner erennere 13 57 WSESSION Command vaca Va taeda eared wea aan es 13 57 WSOURGE COMME RUE A ORS 13 57 WSTACK Command 4 4 55 4 t0 4 A a SS ean 13 58 WWATCH Commatidis A tb eed AAA Fe wea eed 13 58 ads cache tecisters is es Zdceosnd Sum Puntos sli De Re laos 14 8 ps RAN 14 9 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 14 11 14 12 14 13 14 14 14 15 14 16 14 17 14 18 14 19 14 20 14 21 14 22 14 23 14 24 14 25 14 26 14 27 14 28 14 29 14 30 14 31 14 32 14 33 14 34 14 35 14 36 14 37 14 38 Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc dspd break sacs nid airada r dd 14 10 dspd_ce architecture nas Dest yes pets EEEE yess it 14 10 dspace ead TAG Uria dera a based Aum aid 14 11 daspales r
138. and that all fields are required Note The instruction register length must not be specified for a device which has been allocated an ADS device number 13 17 DISASSEMBLE Single Line Disassembler DISASSEMBLE dev_list B byte wide address _block The DISASSEMBLE command allows the user to review DSP object code in its assembly language mnemonic format All invalid opcodes will display DC for define constant The b byte wide parameter constructs the instruction words by taking one byte from each word of memory starting from the specified address Example 13 15 DISASSEMBLE Command Command Explanation disassemble Disassemble a page of instructions pointed at by the user interface program disassembler counter of the current default target DSP address A counter maintains the last instruction disassembled so subsequent instructions may be disassembled by merely entering a carriage return to execute the same instruction again 13 24 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc DISPLAY Display Register or Memory Example 13 15 DISASSEMBLE Command Command Explanation disassemble p 0 20 Disassemble program memory address block 0 to 20 of the current default target DSP address disassemble dv2 x 50 10 Disassemble ten instructions of the target DSP address 2 startin
139. and the ADS quits immediately with a non zero exit status QUIT disable specifies that the ADS does not exit Example 13 34 QUIT Command quit Close all currently open files and return to the Operating System Target DSP may be left running until the program is re entered quit e Specify that errors in a macro command will cause the ADS to exit with a non zero status The ADS does ont exit when this commend is performed Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 43 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc RADIX Change Input or Display Radix 13 36 RADIX Change Input or Display Radix RADIX dev_list B bin D dec F f1t H hex U uns reg _block address _block The RADIX command allows the user to change the default number base for command entry Hexadecimal constants may always be specified by preceding the constant by a dollar sign Likewise a decimal value may be specified by preceding the constant with a grave accent Note The default radix is hexadecimal when the user interface program is initially invoked This means that hexadecimal constants must be entered with a preceding dollar sign Changing the default radix allows the user to enter constants in the chosen radix without typing the radix specifiers before each constant The RADIX command also allows the user to select the display radix of registers and or memory The default display radix for
140. at is checks to see if the target device is in Debug Mode The return value is TRUE if the device is requesting service FALSE if it is not and DSP_ERROR if the function cannot complete successfully See Example 14 35 Example 14 35 dsp check _ service request Check if device 0 is requesting service include simcom h include protocom h int int devn 0 ok dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 ok dsp_cc_reset devn reset Command Converter ok dsp_reset devn and device 0 to debug mode ok dsp_check_service_request devn Is device devn requesting service 14 2 36 dsp_findmem Get Map Index for Memory Prefix include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h dsp_findmem device_index memory_name memory_map int device_index DSP device to be affected by command char memory_name memory space name enum memory_map memory_map return memory map type dsp_findmem searches the dt_var mem structure for device device_index fora match to the memory_name string provided in the function call If a match is found dsp_findmem returns the memory map maintype structure value through the memory_map parameter and 1 as the function return value otherwise it just returns 0 as the function return value For a list of memory names use the emulator help mem command See Example 14 36 Mo
141. ate the problem There are of course many reasons for saving the state of the Debugger 7 4 1 To Load a Debugger State File 1 From the File menu choose Load then select State 2 Specify the name of the state file in the dialog box 3 Click on Open The current state of the Debugger is replaced by the state information in the adm file For more information see Section 2 3 Loading Object Files on page 2 5 Motorola Debugger and Device Configurations 7 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Changing and Saving Window Preferences 7 5 Changing and Saving Window Preferences You can save the positions and settings of windows that you have open in the Debugger When you restart the Debugger all window positions and settings will be restored 7 5 1 To Save Window Settings 1 From the File menu choose Preferences The dialog box in Figure 7 5 appears Preferences Ea All Windows al Assembly i Source Register Memory Stack a 4 b Font FP Save Window Status On Exit Cancel Apply Figure 7 5 Saving Window Status on Exit 2 Mark the checkbox labeled Save Window Status On Exit 3 Click OK The position and font of each window that is open will be retained after you have exited the Debugger 7 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semicond
142. ault it is set to 32 DSP_CMDSZ This define constant determines the size of the previous command stack The emulator commands are stored in the stack and can be reviewed using the Ctrl f and Ctrl b key entries As a default the previous command stack size is set to 10 DSP_WINSZ This define constant determines the size of the screen buffer that is maintained and displayed by the scrmgr c functions It specifies the number of display lines that will be allocated for each device as they are created with the emulator device command The user can use the Ctrl u Ctrl t Ctrl v and Ctrl d key sequences to review display lines that have scrolled off the screen This constant should not be set to a value smaller than the number of lines in the display window Motorola Library Functions 14 71 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Modification of Emulator Global Structures 14 72 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Index Symbols 13 44 adm 7 7 13 45 cld 4 6 13 37 13 45 cmd 13 38 lod 4 7 13 36 13 37 13 45 log 13 38 A abbreviations 13 6 adm 14 44 14 50 ads_cache_registers 14 7 ads_startup 14 8 alternate directories 4 1 assembly 12 7 13 51 13 53 assign 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 11 6 13 13 32 13 33 13 34 13 40 13 41 13 42 B break 2 15 3 1
143. automatically update themselves to reflect the new device This allows you to display the information for separate devices in separate windows at the same To see the information for the new default device open another Assembly window Source window etc To specify the default device from the command line see Section 13 16 DEVICE Select Default Device on page 13 22 7 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Changing the Radix 7 3 Changing the Radix You can change the default radix number base that the Debugger uses for command parameters and other values that you input You can also change the radix used to display specific registers and memory locations As an alternative to changing the default radix you can also denote the number base of a value by preceding it with a dollar sign an apostrophe or a percent sign value is hexadecimal i value is decimal value is binary The Debugger begins with the default radix set to decimal for input and hexadecimal for most output Changing the default input radix is useful because it allows you to enter values without having to type the radix specifiers before each value 7 3 1 To Change the Radix of Input 1 From the Modify menu choose Radix then select Set default The dialog box in Figure 7 3 appears Set Default Radix E Radix Decimal Hex
144. ave Command Converter Memory to a File Load the file onceseq lod into the Y memory of the default Command Converter 13 11 CSAVE Save Command Converter Memory to a File CSAVE dev_num address_block filename 0 a c The CSAVE command allows you to save the Command Converter X or Y data memory to a disk file This is useful when debugging user defined OnCE command sequences using the Command Converter monitor program sequence format If a file currently exists with the filename specified your will be prompted for an action of either appending the data to the file overwriting the file or aborting the command You can include the file action in the command line using the o overwrite a append or the c cancel argument These flags are especially useful when using macro command files Example 13 7 CSAVE Command csave dv0 3 y 0 20 onceseg lod Saves the contents of Command Converters 0 1 2 and 3 Y memory addresses 0 to hex 20 to a file named onceseq lod csave x 10 10 newdata lod Saves the contents of the default Command Converter s X memory addresses hex 10 through hex 1A to a file named newdata lod 13 12 CSTEP Step Through OnCE Sequence CSTEP dev_list count The CSTEP command allows you to execute a group of OnCE serial sequences before displaying the OnCE register contents This gives you the opportunity to write and debug a OnCE command sequence using the Command Converter monitor program sequence
145. ays the C function call stack Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 53 WHERE Command where Display the call stack where3 Display the three innermost frames in the call stack 13 54 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WLIST GUI List Window where 5 Display the five outermost frames in the call stack 13 55 WINPUT GUI File Input Window WINPUT dev_list OFF WINPUT is a GUI command that opens an input window The input window lists all simulated input assignments for the specified device Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 54 WINPUT Command winput Open an input window for the current device winput off Close the input window for the current device 13 56 WLIST GUI List Window WLIST win_ num OFF WLIST is a GUI command that opens a list window A list window is used to view a test file within the ADS environment Multiple list windows may be opened for viewing multiple text files Example 13 55 WLIST Command Command Explanation wlist lfile lst Open a list window with the text file Ifile 1st displayed wlist win2 lfile lst Open a list window with a window number of 2 with text Ifile txt displayed If list window 2 already exists replace the content
146. ber Example change pc test asm 30 source_filename lin Translates to the address associated with line_number in the named source file e_number Example change pc test asm 30 source filename Translates to the address associated with the first line in the named source file Example list test asm source filename Translates to the address associated with the first line in the named a source file Example list test asm For more information see Section 2 3 Loading Object Files on page 2 5 Motorola Expressions 10 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Using Constants 10 5 Using Constants Constants represent quantities of data that do not vary in value during the execution of a program 10 5 1 Numeric Constants Numeric constants can be in one of three bases e Binary constants consist of a percent sign followed by a string of binary digits 0 1 For example 1010 001100 e Hexadecimal constants consist of a dollar sign followed by a string of hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F or a f For example AP Ae i SEE 12FF S12ff e Decimal constants can be either floating point or integer Integer decimal constants consist of a string of decimal 0 9 digits Floating point constants are indicated either by a preceding following or included decimal point or by the presence of an upper or lower case E
147. ble DSP Mnemonics include proto56n h n k 1 3 8 include proto96k h int dspt_unasm_xxxxx ops return_string sr omr gdbp unsigned long ops Pointer to opcodes to be disassembled char return_string Pointer to return character buffer unsigned long sr Value of device status register unsigned long omr Value of device operating mode register char gdbp Return value reserved for use by debugger dspt_unasm_xxxxx disassembles ops 0 and possibly ops 1 and ops 2 if ops 0 requires a second or third word and places the disassembled mnemonic in the return_string buffer supplied by the user If correct disassembly requires a device status register and or operating mode register value the values should be provided in the sr and omr parameters The gdbp parameter is a pointer reserved for use by the symbolic debugger it should be NULL for other applications The mnemonic may require as many as 120 characters of return buffer The function returns the number 1 to 3 of words consumed by the disassembly It returns O for illegal opcodes and a return string containing a DC directive Note The xxxxx in the function name should be replaced by a device family number It should be 56k for the 56000 family devices 56n00 for the 56n00 family devices and 96k for the 96000 family devices See Example 14 24 Example 14 24 dspt_unasm_xxxxx Disassembly of the opcode rep
148. ce retains the contents of the Session window even when you have named another device as the default device In order to see the Session window for a specific device you must specify that specific device as the current device The Session window buffers the last 100 lines of output It might be necessary to scroll through the Session window to see previous output At times you might perform a Motorola Displayed Information 12 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Session Window command that displays more than 100 lines of output to the Session window In this case you will want to pause the output to the Session window To pause output to the Session window 1 From the Display menu choose More Then select On 2 The Session window will now pause if more than 100 lines of information are displayed at once For example if you perform a command such as typing help io from the command line it is likely that the resulting output to the Session window will be greater than 100 lines The dialog box in Figure 12 4 appears GUI56300 x Figure 12 4 Pausing Output to the Session Window 3 Click OK to display the next 100 lines in the Session window For more information see Section 2 4 Setting Up the Display Environment on page 2 7 and Section 7 2 Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 12 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Informa
149. cified by periph_num and reg_num from device device_index and stores the value in the location pointed to by reg_val Registers which return more than one word as the register value will return the least significant word in reg_val 0 or the most significant word in reg_val 1 Use the emulator help reg command to obtain a list of the valid periph_num and reg_num values and reg_val size for each register Also dsp_findreg can be used to obtain the peripheral and register number by using the register name as a key See Example 14 53 Example 14 53 dsp_rreg Read register r3 from device 0 a 56002 Use dsp_findreg to obtain the peripheral and register numbers corresponding to the register name 23 include simcom h include protocom h int devn int periph_num reg_num unsigned long regval devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 if dsp _findreg devn r3 amp periph_num amp reg_num dsp_rreg devn periph_num reg_num amp regval 14 2 54 dsp_save Save All DSP Structures to State File include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_save filename char filename Full name of State File to be saved dsp_save saves all DSP device structures to an emulation state file This function does not invoke the user interface functions which provide pathname and adm suffix extension so the entire filename must be specified The function retur
150. com h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int devn status enum memory_map write_memtyp memory space to write unsigned long write_address address of location to write write_store location to hold value to write devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 write_memtyp DSP_CC_XMEM set memory space for write write_address 0x00401 set write address write required location status dsp_cc_wmem devn write_memtyp write_address amp write_store Motorola Library Functions 14 35 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 34 dsp_cc_wmem_b1k Write Command Converter Memory Block include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int dsp_cc_wmem_blk device mtype address count value int device Command Converter affected by command enum memory_map mtype Memory space to write unsigned long address Address of location to write unsigned long count number of locations to write unsigned long value Source buffer for write values dsp_cc_wmem_b1k writes count locations in the Command Converter device memory space mt ype address address and obtaining the values from the buffer pointed to by value Valid values for mtype are DSP_CC_ YMEM DSP_
151. commands at a command line The command line is a part of the Command window see Figure 1 1 command history Command AT E wasm rs weommand help help pin command line help io help hid device number help line asm break change copy device disassemble lt space gt more Figure 1 1 DSP Debugger Command Window In the Command window notice that several common commands are displayed on the help line The remaining commands can be displayed by pressing the SPACE bar when the cursor is at the beginning of the command line It is not necessary to type the complete command You only need to type the first one to three characters of the command for the debugger to recognize the command The minimum number of required characters for each command is highlighted in red on the help line You can display the complete syntax for a particular command by typing the command or the required characters on the command line and then pressing the SPACE bar The complete syntax of the command that you began typing is displayed on the help line Any text that follows a semicolon on the command line is considered a user comment You might use comments if you were logging output from the Session window or creating and running a command macro The command that you have typed in on the command line is executed when you press the ENTER key or the CARRIAGE RETURN key If the command is not a valid debugger command the debugger interprets the comma
152. contents after each command is executed The serial commands reside in the Command Converter Y memory and are pointed to by the Command Converter YPTR register A macro command file can help in single stepping through user defined OnCE sequences and displaying results The display of registers after a CSTEP or CTRACE were not implemented because of the nature of having to access the OPDBR register to retrieve the register values An example of a macro file would be the following Example 13 11 CTRACE Command in a Macro etrace 2 single step 2 OnCE commands and show XPTR and YPTR after each trace cdisplay x 80 90 y 80 9f display the Command Converter x and y memory display display the target registers 13 14 CHANGE Change Register or Memory Value CHANGE dev_list reg _block address _block expression The CHANGE command allows you to examine or modify values contained in registers or memory Memory blocks can be initialized to a particular value by including an end address If the command is entered without a value the register or memory location of the current default target DSP address will be displayed with its current value on the command line You will then be prompted for a new value Multiple changes can be specified in a single command line Each specified destination block must be followed by the value of the expression to be assigned to it An interactive mode of register or memory display and change can be
153. counter will be cleared before program simulation Execution will begin from the address you specify 4 Select the Go to Breakpoints checkbox if you want to stop execution at a particular breakpoint If selected all other stop breakpoints will be ignored 5 Under Break Number select the breakpoint where you want to stop execution To see where you have breakpoints set Display the Current Breakpoints in the breakpoint window 6 Under Count specify how many times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before stopping For example if you set the count to 3 the program execution will be stopped on the third time that the breakpoint is encountered The last instruction executed will be the breakpoint 7 When all conditions are set click OK Execution will begin Motorola Getting Started 2 19 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Starting Execution with Go Notice that during execution the status bar in the lower left corner of the Debugger window shows the number of the device where execution is taking place the PC program counter and the cycle count updated every 1 000 cycles As an alternative you can start program execution using the GO button located on the toolbar For more information see section 5 1 Resetting the Device Registers Also see section 13 24 GO Execute DSP Program in Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference 2 20 Suite56
154. cution The icons located on the toolbar duplicate the same kind of controls found under the Execute menu Using the toolbar provides a quicker way to do some of these things than using the Execute menu The icons on the toolbar are as follows Go Button Starts program execution from the next address All breakpoints are observed Stop Button Stops program execution or a command macro if running Step Button Executes next instruction or line Next Button Executes next instruction or line Finish Button Allows the current function to execute to completion W Ey apl pe bal 3 Device Button Allows setting of the default device to which all commands will be directed p Repeat Button Repeats the last command in the history buffer Reset Button Resets the current device elo All of these commands are also available from the command line described in Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference Motorola Debugger Toolbar 11 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Go Button 11 1 Go Button The Go button starts program execution beginning with the next address Figure 11 1 ly Hees peny inbe lan z zel genle DAN asun yu Brea 2 p 00010E h devzb pr d19 cyr 24 x S HHHHHHHHHHHH y HHHHHHHHHHHH a aqgagagennponn b 00 ppoppppopngd x HAHAHA xHe HHHHHH r HHHHHH n H yled HAHAHA cash HAHAHA md az 00 al DDDDDD r5 DDDDAQ ns a h
155. d Parameters List of Abbreviations 13 3 Command Parameters List of Abbreviations The following is a list of abbreviations used for parameters on the command syntax line Table 13 2 List of Abbreviations Abbreviation Description address An address may be specified as a source file line number or as a debug information the valid memory space prefixes from the command line of the Command window type help mem symbol name if a previously loaded COFF object file contains symbolic Otherwise a memory space designator must be used To see a list of address_block addressOlocation address count bn Break number A decimal integer constant in the range 1 to 99 break_action H halt In increment CNTn N note S show X command count Positive integer expression in range 1 to 7fffffff dev_list Device list in the form dvx dv0 x dvx y z where x represents a device number One or more targets can be addressed this way For example device group 0 through 4 is expressed dv0 4 And the device set of 1 3 and 5 is expressed as dv1 3 5 dev_num Device number Range is dv0 to dv31 13 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc Command Parameters List of Abbreviations Table 13 2 List of Abbreviations Continued
156. d by the DSP Macro Assembler An OMF file may be created by using the DSP Macro Assembler or by using the SAVE command or by some user generated method If no filename suffix is specified a OMF format lod file is searched first and if not found then a COFF format cld file is searched Loading a COFF format file replaces the target DSP symbolic debug information unless the M option is specified Programs are loaded into the memory map and address specified by each data record A directory path may be specified with the filename The default path for each target DSP address can be changed with the PATH command 13 36 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc LOG Log Commands or Session Output If S is specified as the second of three parameters the ADS interface program will load filename as an ADS state file The ADS state file may be created using the SAVE s command Loading the ADS state changes all ADS setups as well as registers and memory to the previous definition saved in the state filename If no filename suffix is specified adm is assumed If M is specified as the second parameter the ADS interface program will load object file filename cld or lod without modifying the target DSP symbolic debug information If D is specified as the second parameter the ADS will load only the symbolic debug information from the object file
157. d was successful 0 if there was an error See Example 14 46 Example 14 46 dsp_load Load the emulator state from the file lunchbreak adm include simcom h include protocom h int err ads_startup 100 ADSP56000 dsp_startup err dsp_load lunchbrk adm 14 44 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 47 dsp_new Create New DSP Device Structure include simcom h include protocom h dsp_new device_index device_type int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command char device_type Name corresponding to DSP device type dsp_new creates a new DSP structure that represents a DSP device device_index and initializes it It will be necessary to use the dsp_unlock function call prior to dsp_new if the selected device_type is password protected See Example 14 47 Example 14 47 dsp_new Create DSP device structures for a three device emulation include simcom h include protocom h int devn ads_startup 100 ADSP56000 dsp_startup for devn 0 devn lt 3 devn t dsp_new devn 56002 Create new DSP structures 14 2 48 dsp_path Construct Filename include simcom h include protocom h dsp_path path_name base_name suffix new_name
158. ddr Initiate program execution from addr dsp_go_reset devn Initiate program execution after reset Motorola Library Functions 14 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc ADS Object Library Files Table 14 6 dsp _ ADS Interface Routines Routine Description dsp_init devn Initialize selected device dsp_ldmem devn filename Load device memory from filename dsp load filename Load all device states from filename dsp_new devn device_type Create new DSP device dsp _path path base suffix new_name Create filename from path base and suffix dsp_realloc mem_blk nbytes Reallocate memory block dsp_reset devn Reset specified DSP device dsp_rmem devn map addr mem_val Read DSP memory map addr to mem_val dsp_rmem_b1k devn map addr count value Read Block of DSP Memory Locations dsp_rreg devn periphn regn regval Read DSP peripheral register to regval dsp_save filename Save the state of all devices to filename dsp_spath base sufx retn Search path for specified file dsp_startup Initialize emulator structures dsp_status devn mode Determine DSP Device Status dsp_step devn step Execute counted instructions dsp_stop devn Force DSP device into Debug Mode
159. dicate the memory space in register R1 0 P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 14 Output File Assembly Code for DSP56600 Family Operation Comment MOVE 030c X0 output to file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE S100 RO write data from address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode Motorola Imputand Output Files 615 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Output File 6 5 5 DSP56800 Family Output The output file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 16 bit register Indicate these by writing the file number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 8 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 O P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 15 Output File Assembly Code for DSP56800 Family Operation Comment MOVE S030c X0 output to file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE S100 RO write data from address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 5 6 DSP96000 Family Output The output file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 32 bit register Indicate these by writing the file number in the upper 16 bits and the count in the lower 16 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 0 P 1 X 2
160. displayed if the file is not found in any of these directories 4 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Saving Object Files 4 3 2 To Load an OMF lod File 1 From the File menu choose Load then select Memory OMF 2 Specify the filename in the dialog box It is not necessary to type the extension with the filename The Debugger assumes the lod extension 3 Click Open Keep in mind that the object file is loaded into the memory of the current device If you want to load the file into another device you must first select that device as the default device For more information abut setting the default device see Section 7 2 Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 and Section 7 4 Loading Debugger State Files on page 7 7 To load an OMF file from the command line see Section 13 29 LOAD Load DSP Files on page 13 36 4 4 Saving Object Files You can save memory blocks in DSP COFF or ASCII OMF object files The object files can be reloaded with the Debugger or used in any other environment where such files are recognized Motorola Object Files and Data Files 4 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Saving Object Files 4 4 1 To Save a COFF cld File 1 RN A W N DN 4 6 From the File menu choose Save then select Memory COFF T
161. dsp_alloc 100 sizeof char status dspd_cc_revision devn rev_buf 14 2 9 dspd_cc_write_flag Write Command Converter Flag Word include cc h include simcom h include driver h int dspd_cc_write_flag device_index flag value int device_index int flag unsigned long value dspd_cc_write_flag writes to flag word flag on Command Converter device_index fetching the value from the location pointed to by value Valid values for flag are e DSP_CC_FLAGS DSP_CC_STATUS DSP_CC_XPTR DSP_CC_YPTR e DSP_CC_DEVICE_ADDRESS DSP_CC_CLOCK_RATE DSP_CC_DEVICE_COUNT e DSP_CC_DEVICE_ACTIVE The function returns DSP_OK on success DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 9 14 14 Suites6 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 9 dspd_cc_write_flag Write Command Converter flags include cc h include simcom h include driver h int devn status devn 0 status dspd_cc_write_flags devn DSP_CC_YPTR 0x04001 14 2 10 dspd_cc_write_memory Write to Command Converter Memory include simcom h include driver h include cc h int dspd_write_memory device_index mem_space address count value int device_index Command Converter affected by command int mem_space Memory space to write uns
162. e The input data value can be in decimal binary hexadecimal or floating point form The Debugger will interpret the data based on the input radix specified in the input command The default input radix is hexadecimal If a data value contains a decimal point the data will be input as a floating point value overriding the input radix specification The number base of data values can also be denoted by preceding the data value with a dollar sign an apostrophe or a percent sign input as hexadecimal 6 input as decimal input as binary 6 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc How are I O files formatted Untimed memory input data values will be applied each time the device performs a read operation on the memory location In other words the input file acts like a stack of input data each successive data value is retrieved from the stack file when a read operation occurs If a lower case letter t is placed in a data position of the input file you will be prompted for the next input data value as described in section 6 1 4 Terminal Input of Data Values Output data value can be in decimal binary hexadecimal floating point or string form The output radix is specified in the output command The default output radix is hexadecimal The string form of output data uses the value written to the memor
163. e 10 2 13 27 13 28 execute 2 19 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 24 3 25 3 26 13 39 13 46 13 47 13 48 13 49 exit 13 43 expressions 8 7 10 1 10 2 10 6 10 9 10 10 13 27 F file i o commands 14 58 14 59 filename 14 46 memory 14 66 state file 14 44 14 50 14 65 filename 13 42 13 43 filename suffixes adm 14 44 14 50 cld 14 44 14 66 cmd 14 59 lod 14 31 14 44 files 4 5 6 1 finish 3 25 11 5 13 28 force 13 28 13 29 format 6 1 frame 8 3 8 4 13 29 13 51 function 13 54 function library filenames 14 64 function name prefixes 14 2 global variables 14 70 G GO 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 18 11 2 13 30 H hardware 2 15 2 16 3 16 3 17 help 12 4 13 30 13 31 hexadecimal 13 44 host 13 31 13 32 VO 6 1 8 5 8 6 13 44 initialization window parameters 14 64 input 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 13 32 13 33 13 34 13 35 13 45 13 47 13 55 instruction 13 46 13 47 13 48 13 49 introduction 10 1 J JTAG reset types 14 19 Index 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc L list 13 35 13 36 13 52 13 53 13 55 load 2 5 2 6 4 4 4 5 7 7 13 36 13 37 13 45 lock 13 50 lod 14 31 14 44 log 9 1 9 2 13 38 macro command file execution 14 58 14 59 in_macro 14 58 14 59 macros 13 39 memory 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 7 1 7 3 10 3 13 4
164. e 5 5 Displaying Memory Values 5 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Displaying Memory Values Notice that the title bar of the memory window indicates e the device number that you are viewing e the number of the memory window This is shown because you can display other memory windows simultaneously e the type of memory space Again you could have several memory windows open each corresponding to a different memory space The addresses of the memory locations are indicated by the left most column of numbers An address in that column is the address of the value immediately to the right the second column In the above example the first address shown is p 000000 which contains the value 0014a0 The first several addresses above are as shown in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Sample P Memory Address Locations Address Content p 000000 0014a0 p 000001 0001e0 p 000002 ffff01 p 000003 ffff01 p 000004 000033 p 000005 SOOOOfE p 000006 000255 p 000007 16776961 p 000008 000255 p 000009 000255 p 00000a 000000 p 00000b 000000 p 00000c 000000 Notice that the contents of memory are not necessarily displayed as hexadecimal You can specify that an address be displayed in another radix by changing the radix In t
165. e Display menu select Path to see the absolute path of the working directory 4 2 1 To Set an Alternate Path 1 From the File menu choose Path then select Add 2 If appropriate select another drive from the Volumes menu 3 Move up or down the directory tree until the directory you want is in the list of subdirectories 4 Highlight the desired directory by single clicking on it in the list of subdirectories 5 Click on Select The selected directory is now added to the end of the list of alternate paths Note From the Display menu select Path to see the absolute path of the working directory Motorola Object Files and Data Files 4 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Loading Object Files 4 2 2 To Clear the Alternate Paths 1 From the File menu choose Path then select Clear Alternate Path List The list of alternate paths is cleared for all devices The path of the working directory is not cleared Keep in mind that a separate working directory is maintained for each device However all devices share the same alternate directory paths To be safe always check the path of the working directory after adding a device or setting the default device Remember that in order to change the path of a device that is not currently the default device you must first change the default device see Section 7 2 Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 To set the path fro
166. ead amor ura eles wea ta She heyy aie ads 14 12 ASP CC TOSCL lc AAA a Oe A oe Oe Sees 14 13 US PALCEOVISION e ES DS OES A AAA 14 14 dspa ee Write Ha crese AER 14 15 AspALCE Write MEMOLy RS AAA AAA 14 16 dspa seheck service requests 14 17 dspd fill mem ry A TI ASA 14 18 dspd OA Ab o 14 19 dspa jtag restliUer tareas A a 14 19 dspd read core TEBISICESIO ces ii rd at a Bas 14 20 dspd_read_memory srta ac reia 14 21 spd ead Once reiteran si 14 22 APO LLOSA RDA ATA AS AA ARS A 14 23 dspd status estrada 14 24 dspd write core repisters ea 6d ede a wees 14 25 dspd write mem ry rrer sros rat died ae gt PERG lia das 14 26 dspd_write_once_registers voce were teehee Neate tae es 14 26 dspt masmi XXXXX sp AA ASA EE ome 14 27 dspt_unasm_XXXXX 2 on Ged daar dnd VA 14 28 sp Masia oa te PARAS AREA Ue La a 14 29 dsp c AMES ewe ae SKE Pee gis ve ANA AS 14 30 ASPE AAA tee ees A See Kode 14 30 dsp tc ANO SA ASA AR E 14 31 dsputo rescatada 14 32 CSP CC revision e ias 14 32 dsp cCTINEM 20 ons RS AAA AAA OR AA 14 33 Sp Ge Mena DI std ACA AS 14 34 Usp e Beata i T SoM aaa oe aaa ye Ea ot 14 35 dspace winemMe bla A 14 36 dsp check service tequestivaias ias oia da 14 37 dsp findmem ersan lA PS Sige eg tes 14 38 aspire Dress pipi ido potes dia 14 38 dsp si ss 14 39 xv For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 14 39 14 40 14 41 14 42 14 43 14 44 14 45 14 46 14 47 14 48 14 49 14 50 14 51 14 52 14
167. ected by command char loadfn Name of file to be loaded dsp_cc_ldmem loads memory in the Command Converter device_index from the file Loadfn This is a lower level routine which does not call the user level filename routines loadfn must contain the fully specified name of the file to be opened The file is OMF format the file extension should be lod The return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 28 Example 14 28 dsp _cc_l1dmem Load Command Converter memory from file include simcom h include protocom h int devn status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dsp_cc_ldmem devn c dspdev bin loadfile lod 14 2 29 dsp_cc_reset Reset Command Converter include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_cc_reset device int device CC device affected by command dsp_cc_reset resets the Command Converter device Function dspd_cc_architecture is called to configure the Command Converter for the type of DSP device attached This procedure may be called as part of the initialization procedures to guarantee the Command Converter is in a known state to recover from a lockup or at any other time when the Command Converter needs to be restarted The return value is TRUE if the operation succeeds FALSE otherwise See Example 14 29 Motorola Library Functions 14 31 For
168. ectory tree until the directory you want is in the list of subdirectories There are a number of ways to do this You can move up and down the directory tree with the left arrow and right arrow buttons move down the tree by double clicking in the list of subdirectories move up the tree by selecting a directory from the drop down box where the parent directory is displayed select a directory from the History menu which shows recently selected directories Motorola Getting Started 2 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing the Path 4 Click once on the desired directory from the list of subdirectories so that it is highlighted Notice that the highlighted directory appears in the area labeled Directory 5 Click Select The selected directory is now the working directory Display the current path to see the absolute path of the working directory To set an alternate path 1 From the File menu choose Path then select Add 2 If appropriate select another drive from the Volumes menu 3 Move up or down the directory tree until the directory you want is in the list of subdirectories 4 Highlight the desired directory by single clicking it in the list of subdirectories 5 Click Select The selected directory is now added to the end of the list of alternate paths Display the current path to see the list of alternate paths To clear the
169. ecuted which happened to end in the middle of the subroutine Or an until condition or breakpoint might be reached while in the middle of a subroutine In any instance where the Debugger has stopped execution in the middle of a subroutine or function the subroutine or function can be made to finish execution 3 13 1 To Finish Execution of the Current Function or Subroutine 1 From the Execute menu choose Finish The Debugger continues until encountering an RTS instruction Execution continues only to the end of the current function If another function is encountered during a finish operation the execution of the function that was encountered is not completed As an alternative you can also use the Finish button on the toolbar To use the finish command from the command line see section 13 21 FINISH Step Until End of Current Subroutine on page 13 28 More information about the finish command is available in section 3 2 Step Through Instructions and section 3 4 Executing the Next Instruction Motorola Controlling Execution 3 25 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Stopping Program Execution 3 14 Stopping Program Execution You can stop program execution or the execution of a command macro at any time 3 14 1 To Stop Program or Command Macro Execution 1 From the Execute menu choose Stop Notice that this is the only menu item you can choose wh
170. ed DSPs break al 32 t i gt 10 h Break if the program reaches line 32 and the C variable i is greater than 10 break le p 320 h Halt DSP program execution of default target DSP address and enter Debug mode when the Z or N and V bits of the CCR are equal to 1 at the address 320 of program memory This is a software breakpoint and testing of the Condition Code Register is done real time break al p 320 Halt DSP program execution of default target DSP address and enter Debug mode unconditionally at the address 320 of program memory This is a software breakpoint and must be placed in SRAM break r xa x 300 Halt DSP program execution of the default target DSP address and enter Debug mode when a read access of X data memory address 300 occurs This is a hardware breakpoint which will work with OnCE and JTAG OnCE based DSPs Examples of BREAK on DSP devices with OnCE Ports break rw pcfm p 100 20 Halt DSP program execution of the default target DSP address and enter the Debug mode when the 32nd occurrence of a read or write access of a program core fetch or move occurs at address 100 break rw pce p 250 Halt DSP program execution of default target DSP address and enter Debug mode when a read or write access of program memory address 250 hex occurs 13 14 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc CCH
171. egister names for the target device It is usually best to precede hexadecimal constants with a dollar sign to distinguish them from registers that might have the same name For more information see Section 5 2 Displaying Register Values on page 5 2 and Section 7 3 Changing the Radix on page 7 5 Motorola Expressions 10 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Using Assembler Debug Symbols 10 4 Using Assembler Debug Symbols When loading object files with the Debugger the symbol and line number information present in a COFF cld object file are also be loaded This requires the object file to have been assembled with debugging information The Debugger will accept symbol names or source file line numbers and translate them into an associated memory address In general a symbol name may be referenced in the Debugger just as it was defined in the original source file except for symbol names that conflict with a device s register name In that case the symbol name must be preceded by the character A symbol name can be further delimited by specifying a containing section name in the form section_name symbol_name with the character being used as the separator The section name global may be used for the global section If a symbol is specified without a preceding section name the Debugger assumes the section containing the current pc Line numbers can be
172. em the switch indicates that the command converter being used is a Universal Command Converter UCC ads56300 d dev mdsp0 Launches the text version of the ADS Debugger for the DSP56300 Assuming that the Debugger is running on a UNIX operating system the switch indicates that the command converter being used is a Universal Command Converter UCC gds56300 d parallel 3 Launches the GUI version of the ADS Debugger for the DSP56300 The switch indicates that the command converter being used is a parallel port command converter located on the LPT3 port gds56800 d pci Launches the GUI version of the ADS Debugger for the DSP56800 The switch indicates that the command converter being used is a PCI command converter gds56600 d ethernet t23 123 123123 Launches the GUI version of the ADS Debugger for the DSP56600 The switch indicates that the command converter being used is an ethernet command converter installed on the server with IP address 123 123 123 123 1 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Entering Commands 1 4 Entering Commands You can perform most of the work with the debugger by using the menu bar and the toolbar However you might sometimes find it useful to perform some commands from a command line Motorola s DSP Debugger provides you the option of entering
173. er Values Notice that the title bar of the register window indicates 5 3 The device number where the peripheral resides the number of the register window This number is shown because you can display other register windows for other peripherals the type of peripheral The peripheral type is shown for easy identification Several register windows can be open each corresponding to a different peripheral Changing Register Values You can change the value of the device registers when instruction execution is halted 5 3 1 To Change the Value of a Specific Register 1 From the Modify menu choose Change Register The dialog box in Figure 5 3 appears Change Register X m Registers Value eh Cancel Apply Figure 5 3 Changing the Value of Register 2 Select the register whose value you want to change 3 Under Value type in the value to which you want the register to be set 4 Click OK More information about using registers is available in Section 10 3 Using Register Name Symbols on page 10 3 To work with registers from the command line see Section 13 14 CHANGE Change Register or Memory Value on page 13 20 section 5 2 Displaying Register Values Motorola Managing Memory and Registers 5 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Displaying Memory Values 5 4 Displaying Memory Values You can display the valu
174. es in memory whenever instruction execution is halted 5 4 1 To Display Memory Values 1 From the Windows menu choose Memory The dialog box in Figure 5 4 appears Open Memory Window x f 0 O FfFFFE pe pi or pr depending upon address and omr x coa tmp Figure 5 4 Open Memory Window Dialog Box 2 From the drop down list select the memory space for which you want values displayed 3 Click OK The memory values for the memory space that you chose appear in a memory window For example if you had chosen to display values in the p memory space you would see a window similar to the one in Figure 5 5 type in address you device number memory space want displayed first value of this row Dv00 Memory Wini p this column displays the address of the p 000000 0014a0 0001e0 SO Sto 000033 ES first value of this row p 000005 0000ff 000255 16776961 0000255 0000255 p 00000a 000000 000000 s000000 000000 000000 p 00000f 000000 000000 s000000 000000 000000 p 000014 000000 000000 s000000 000000 000000 p 000019 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 p 00001e 000000 000000 s000000 000000 000000 p 000023 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 p 000028 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 p 00002d e7000N noona 000000 sononer teats i Figur
175. escale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Command Syntax command the Debugger interprets the command as the name of a command macro and executes the macro if it exists For more information see Section 13 Debugger Command Reference on page 13 1 Section 13 2 Command Syntax 13 2 Command Syntax The syntax of a Debugger command is written with special punctuation to indicate command keywords required or optional fields repeated fields and implied actions For example the syntax of the CHANGE DISPLAY and WAIT commands look like this DisPLAY ON OFF R W RW reg _block _group addr _block EVALUATE B binary D dec F float H hex U unsigned expression c_expression WAIT count seconds The punctuation of the syntax line includes Table 13 1 Command Syntax Syntax Description Square brackets enclose command parameters that are optional The brackets themselves are not entered as a part of the command For example in the WAIT command the count parameter is optional The slash is used to separate alternative command parameters You can only enter one of the parameters in the list The slash is not entered as a part of the command For example in the EVALUATE command the optional first parameter can be one of the following B D F H or U Parentheses surround a description of an implied action This is included to help clarify some of the abbreviations o
176. estination memory maps can be different This allows you to move data or program code from one memory map to another or to a different address within the Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 21 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc DEVICE Select Default Device same memory map The COPY command allows the copying of program or data blocks within a single target DSP device To transfer information from one target device to another use the SAVE command to create an object file which may then be loaded into the destination device Example 13 13 COPY Command Command Explanation copy p 0 30 p 100 Copy the data in current default target DSP address program memory starting at 0 and ending at 30 to program memory starting at 100 copy dv3 p 0 30 dv2 p 100 Copy the data in target DSP address number 3 program memory starting at 0 and ending at 30 to target DSP address number 2 program memory starting at 100 copy x 0 100 p 0 Copy one hundred memory locations beginning at x memory location 0 to p memory beginning at location 0 copy x 100 200 x 5150 Copy the data in the current default target DSP address X memory starting from hex 200 down to hex 100 and put the data in the current default target DSP address X memory starting at hex 250 down to hex 150 Whenever the addresses of the source and destination overlap the source end address will be used and
177. et device 6 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Assigning an Input File Table 6 1 Input File Numbers for Specific Suite56 DSP Devices eat Number and Word Count Designate the PER TR eating and Word Count in Register DSP56000 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits DSP56100 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP56300 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits DSP56600 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP56800 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP96000 RO File Number in the upper 16 bits count in the lower 16 bits 2 Write to the appropriate register a designator that indicates the memory space and to another register the address where you want the data to be written Designate the memory space as follows 0 p 1 x 2 y 3 1 Table 6 2 Input File Memory Space and Destination Register Device Designate the Memory Space Put the Address Where the Input Data Family in Register Will Be Written in Register DSP56000 R1 RO DSP56100 R1 RO DSP56300 R1 RO DSP56600 R1 RO DSP56800 R1 RO DSP96000 R2 R1 3 Place a debug instruction at an appropriate address in your program This is the point in the program where you want the da
178. evelopment System ADS is a development tool used to design real time signal processing systems The ADS consolidates complex hardware and software development tools within a low cost workstation environment and runs on most of the well supported operating systems such as Windows HP UX Sun and Solaris By providing a solid foundation for application development and test the ADS significantly reduces development costs and time to market The versatile ADS not only allows rapid initial development but also supports comprehensive testing of prototype designs The four ADS components are the following e Host Bus Interface Board There are two types of boards available 16 bit ISA bus for PC compatibles and HP7xx workstations and SBus for Sun and SPARC workstations e Command Converter CC The command converter takes care of communication between your host computer and the target system Motorola s ADS offers several different command converters based on your development needs For details of each command converter see the user manual for the particular command converter that you are using e Control Development and Debugging Software This software is available for the following operating systems Windows 95 Windows NT 4 0 HP UX 9 x Sun OS 4 x and Solaris 5 x e Application Development Module ADM This module supports development and testing with a specific device a DSP chip Motorola DSPs have a common OnCE
179. evice type 56002 for simulation using the password x51 234 13 45 UNTIL Step Until Address UNTIL dev_list addr line number address label The UNTIL command sets a temporary breakpoint at the specified line or address then steps until that breakpoint It then clears the temporary breakpoint and displays the enabled registers and memory blocks in the same manner as the STEP command The addr parameter may be expressed as a line number in the program source file Specification of a line number is valid only if the symbolic debug information has been loaded from a COFF format cld file The debug information is generated using the Assembler s g option Line numbers may be specified as filename Oline_number for a line number in a particular file or simply by line_number for line numbers in the currently displayed file All other breakpoints are ignored while the UNTIL command is executing Example 13 44 UNTIL Command until 20 Go until the instruction associated with line 20 in the current file is reached until p 50 Go until the instruction at hexadecimal address p 50 is reached until lab _2 Go until the instruction at label lab_2 is reached 13 50 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WAIT Wait Specified Time 13 46 UP Move Up the C Function Call Stack UP dev_list n The UP command is used to move up t
180. ex DSP index affected by command dspd_check_service_request checks to see if the target device device_index is requesting service from the host computer The return value is TRUE if the device is requesting service FALSE if it is not requesting service and DSP_ERROR if the function cannot complete successfully See Example 14 11 14 16 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 11 dspd_check_service_request Check to see if a DSP device is requesting service include simcom h include driver h int devn int status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 wait for device to request service while status dspd_check_service_request devn FALSE if status DSP_ERROR return DSP_ERROR device requested service Now find out why el 14 2 12 dspd fill _memory nitialize DSP Memory Buffer to Single Value include simcom h include driver h int dsp_fill memory device_index mem_space address count value int device_index index of DSP device affected by command int mem_space memory space to fill unsigned long address address of start of memory block unsigned long count length of memory block unsigned long value fill value
181. f a list of six breakpoints Disabled breakpoints such as the breakpoint 2 are indicated with the word disabled Dv00 Breakpoints OF ES Break H jump n 21 p 00c420 h disable Break 31 p 0021 00 00af00 Break H4rah Break 5 321 h Break 6 p 000108 h e Figure 12 1 Breakpoints 2 Double click on a breakpoint from the list to toggle it from disabled to enabled or from enabled to disabled Breakpoints that were set by double clicking on a line in the Source window such as breakpoint 5 above are identified by the line number Breakpoints that were set by double clicking on a line in the Assembly window such as breakpoint 6 above are identified by the address Breakpoints and their usage are also discussed in Section 2 6 Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints on page 2 11 Section 2 7 Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints on page 2 15 Section 3 10 Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints on page 3 22 Section 12 6 Source Window on page 12 8 Section 12 5 Assembly Window on page 12 7 12 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Command Window 12 3 Command Window The Command window permits you to enter Debugger commands on a command line In this way the Command window provides an alternative to using the menu bar or the toolbar The Command w
182. f file already exists save dvl s lunchbrk el o Save the target DSP address 1 state to filename lunchbrk el Overwrite the current file lunchbrk el if it exists 13 39 STEP Step Through DSP Program STEP dev_list count LI source lines IN instructions The STEP command allows the user to execute count instructions or C source lines before displaying the enabled registers and memory blocks This command gives the user a quick way to specify execution of a number of instructions without having to set a breakpoint It is similar to the TRACE command except that display occurs only after the count number of cycles or instructions have occurred Note that the address of the first instruction that is to be executed is in the OnCE Program Address Bus Decode Register OPABD If the Program Counter is changed before a TRACE or STEP command is issued the address of the Program Counter Register points to the instruction to be executed CAUTION DSP5616x When single stepping through a BRKcc instruction and the condition is true the instruction immediately following the BRKcc instruction will be displayed by the ADS but will not be executed Instead the DSP will correctly execute the instruction at LA 1 Single stepping Tcc REPcc or REP instructions with initial loop counter equal to zero may cause incorrect DSP operation The main difference between the TRACE and STEP commands is the OnCE port trace counter is armed to
183. f the command Neither the parentheses nor the description inside the parentheses are entered as part of the command For example when entering the EVALUATE command the optional first parameter consists of one letter The words binary dec float etc are only in the command syntax line for clarification An ellipse three consecutive periods indicates that the preceding field may optionally be repeated For example the DISPLAY command can specify multiple registers Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Command Parameters List of Abbreviations Table 13 1 Command Syntax Syntax Description CAPS Capitalized words indicate command keywords Command keywords must be entered exactly as shown The portion of the command keyword shown in BOLDFACE represents the minimum portion of the keyword that you must type The portion of the keyword that is not in boldface may be typed if desired but is not required The Debugger will automatically type the remainder of a keyword if you type the boldface characters and then press the SPACE key Many of the command parameters such as addr and reg are abbreviations See the Command Parameters List of Abbreviations for a list of parameter abbreviations For more information see Section 1 4 Entering Commands on page 1 7 Section 13 3 Comman
184. following commands control the display of windows and are particularly useful in writing command macros WASM opens an assembly window displaying addresses labels and mnemonics WBREAKPOINT opens a breakpoint window displaying current breakpoints WCALLS opens a C call stack window WCOMMAND opens a command window WINPUT opens an input window WLIST opens a list window displaying contents of a specified file WMEMORY opens a memory window WOUTPUT opens an output window WREGISTER opens a register window WSESSION opens the Session window WSOURCE opens a Source window WSTACK opens a stack window WWATCH opens a watch window displaying expressions that have been specified for the watch list For more information see Section 9 1 Creating and Running a Command Macro on page 9 1 Section 13 2 Command Syntax Section 13 3 Command Parameters List of Abbreviations Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Entering Commands 13 1 Entering Commands Most of your work with the Debugger will be performed by using the menu bar and the toolbar However you might sometimes find it useful to perform some commands from a command line Motorola s DSP Debugger provides you the option of entering commands at a command line The command line is a part of the Command Window See Figure 13 1 command history Command Al E3 wasm ry
185. format Note that the OPDBR and OPILR registers always display the last values stored after executing a GO STEP or TRACE command or after servicing a breakpoint The values of these registers will not reflect the changes made to them when executing the CGO CSTEP or CTRACE when doing a display of the OnCE registers Also it is important to remember that writing to the OPDBR register is in effect manipulating the DSP program controller Whenever 2 word opcodes are being written to the OPDBR it is best to CTRACE or CSTEP 2 before displaying registers 13 18 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc CTRACE Trace Through OnCE Sequence Example 13 8 CSTEP Command cstep Executes one OnCE serial command of the default Command Converter s Y memory pointed at by its YPTR The OnCE registers will be displayed after the command is executed cstep 10 Executes 10 hex OnCE serial commands of the default Command Converter s Y memory pointed at by its YPTR The OnCE registers will be displayed after the 10 hex commands have all been executed A macro command file can help in single stepping through user defined OnCE sequences and displaying results The display of registers after a CSTEP or CTRACE were not implemented because of the nature of having to access the OPDBR register to retrieve the register values An example of a macro file wou
186. formation On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 31 dsp_cc_rmem Read Command Converter Memory include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int dsp_cc_rmem device mtype address value int device Command Converter affected by command enum memory_map mtype Memory space to read unsigned long address Address of location to read unsigned long value Target location for read value dsp_cc_rmem reads one location from the Command Converter device memory space mt ype address address and stores the value in the location pointed to by value Valid values for mtype are e DSP_CC_YMEM e DSP_CC_XMEM e DSP_CC_PMEM The return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 31 Example 14 31 dsp_cc_rmem Read location from Command Converter memory include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int devn status enum memory_map read_memtyp memory space to read unsigned long read_address address of location to read read_store location to hold read value devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 read_memtyp DSP_CC_XMEM set memory space for read read_address 0x00401 set read address read required location status
187. functions on the call path to the current function To evaluate expressions from the command line see Section 13 20 EVALUATE Evaluate an Expression on page 13 27 10 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Using Register Name Symbols 10 2 Using Memory Space Symbols The Debugger interprets a memory space symbol followed by an expression as the contents of a memory location The expression following a memory space symbol is converted to an integer constant in the address range of the DSP To see a list of valid memory space prefixes and their corresponding address ranges from the command line of the Command window type help mem Some memory space symbols such as p or x require the Debugger to first read the device Operating Mode Register OMR Others such as xi or pr refer to an exact memory location regardless of the chip operating mode For more information see Section 5 Managing Memory and Registers on page 5 1 and Section 5 5 Changing Memory Values on page 5 6 10 3 Using Register Name Symbols The Debugger interprets a register symbol in an expression as the contents of that register To see a list of valid register names for the device that you are targeting from the command line of the Command window type help reg Note that some hexadecimal constants such as a0 or d1 may also be valid r
188. g at x memory map 50 hex disassemble lab_1 lab 2 Disassemble memory address block beginning at the address corresponding to symbolic label lab_1 and ending at lab_2 disassemble b y S1000 40 Disassemble forty instructions starting at address y 1000 The instruction words are constructed by taking one byte from each location thus depending on the target processor two or three locations are required to hold each instruction word 13 18 DISPLAY Display Register or Memory DISPLAY W executing targets dev_list V ADS user interface program version DISPLAY dev_list ON OFF reg _block _group address _block The DISPLAY command allows the user to examine the contents of a register group and or memory block in the radix specified by the RADIX command The default display radix is hexadecimal It may also be used to enable or disable particular registers or memory locations for automatic display when executing debug commands Entering the command with no parameters will cause the display of all enabled registers and memory blocks Registers and memory blocks may be enabled or disabled by entering the command with one of the enable keywords i e ON or OFF prior to the register and or memory list The keywords have the following meaning e ON Enable display of the following registers and memory locations e OFF Disable display of the following registers and memory locations Enteri
189. ghted If you are clearing consecutive breakpoints you can click and drag to highlight more than one breakpoint Or hold down the CTRL key while clicking on breakpoints to select more than one 3 Click OK The breakpoints you selected are now deleted Breakpoints will not be renumbered For example if you have set breakpoints 1 2 and 3 and then clear breakpoint 2 the remaining breakpoints will be numbered 1 and 3 Notice that breakpoints are indicated in the Assembly window and the Source window if applicable Enabled breakpoints appear in blue Disabled breakpoints appear in pink For more information see section 2 7 Setting and Clearing Hardware Breakpoints section 3 10 Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints on page 3 22 Chapter 10 Expressions section 12 2 Display the Current Breakpoint on page 12 2 and section 13 5 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints on page 13 10 in Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference 3 7 Types of Software Breakpoints There are several types of software breakpoints that you can set with the Debugger The types that are available to you depend on the device on which you are debugging Look below for the device that matches your device to see the software breakpoints that are available to you 3 7 1 DSP56000 DSP56100 DSP56300 and DSP56600 Families The DSP56000 DSP56300 and 56600 device families recognize the DEBUGcc opcode where cc represents a co
190. h go When you indicate go to the Debugger it fetches decodes and executes instructions in the exact manner as a device would if you were debugging an actual device The go command executes the program until one of the following occurs e abreakpoint is reached e you indicate stop e ora debug instruction is encountered 2 18 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Starting Execution with Go 2 8 1 To Start Executing Instructions with Go 1 From the Execute menu choose Go You will see the dialog box in Figure 2 9 Device From _ Goto Breakpomt Go From Address C Reset Break Number Address Figure 2 9 Executing Instructions with Go 2 Under Go From choose whether to Go from an address or to Reset If you choose Reset the Debugger simulates the reset sequence in the processor The instruction pipeline instruction counter and cycle counter will be cleared before program simulation begins The device registers are reset and execution begins at the reset exception address 3 If you chose to go from an address under Address type in the address from which you want to begin executing instructions If you leave the address blank execution will begin from the current program counter value If you specify an address the instruction pipeline instruction counter and cycle
191. he specified address to build up the instruction word to be displayed Similarly the assembled mnemonic instruction is divided into bytes and stored in successive words If the interactive Assembler is invoked with the GUI version of the ADS a dialog box displays the original instruction at the specified location To change the instruction and display the next type the new instruction and click OK To exit the interactive Assembler click CANCEL Any new instruction which has been typed before clicking CANCEL will not be written to the current location The Session and Command windows will be written to during interactive Assembler operations Both windows display the original ASM command the Session window displays each change as it is applied 13 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc ASM Single Line Interactive Assembler Example 13 1 ASM Commands Command Explanation asm p 50 Start interactive Assembler at program memory address 50 hex of the current default device asm Start interactive Assembler at current program counter value of the current default device asm myfile asm 7 Start interactive Assembler at the address corresponding to myfile asm line 7 asm dv3 p 10 Start interactive Assembler at target address 3 program memory address 10 asm nop Overwrite the instruction at the current pc wi
192. he above example the radix of addresses p 000006 through p 000009 is decimal See section 7 3 Changing the Radix for more information To change the radix from the command line see section 13 36 RADIX Change Input or Display Radix Motorola Managing Memory and Registers 5 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Changing Memory Values 5 5 Changing Memory Values You can change the values in memory whenever instruction execution is halted 5 5 1 To Change the Value in Memory 1 From the Modify menu choose Change Memory The dialog box in Figure 5 6 appears Change Memory X Memory Space p i Start Address End Address Value Cancel Apply Figure 5 6 Changing the Value in Memory 2 From the drop down list select the Memory Space that you want to change 3 Under Start Address type the value of the beginning address that you want to change 4 Under End Address type the value of the ending address that you want to change 5 Under Value type the value to which the specified addresses should be changed Keep in mind that all values including the starting and ending values will be changed to the value that you specify The format of this value HEX decimal etc will automatically be the same as the current default radix If you want the format of the value to differ from the default you must use the appropriate radix specifier
193. he call stack It can be used in conjunction with the WHERE FRAME and DOWN commands to display and traverse the C function call stack After entering a new call stack frame using UP that call stack frame becomes the current scope for evaluation In other words for C expressions the EVALUATE command acts as though this new frame is the proper place to start looking for variables Example 13 45 UP Command up Move up the call stack by one stack frame up 3 Move up the call stack by three stack frames 13 47 VIEW Select Display Mode VIEW A assembly S source R register The VIEW command changes the ADS display mode There are three display modes Assembly Source and Register If the VIEW command is entered with a parameter the specified display mode is selected When no parameter is entered the display mode cycles to the next display mode in the following order Source Assembly Register The same results can be obtained by typing Ctrl w Example 13 46 VIEW Command Command Explanation view Cycle to the next display mode among Source Assembly and Register modes view s Select Source display mode view a Select Assembly display mode view r Select Register display mode 13 48 WAIT Wait Specified Time WAIT dev_list B break count seconds The WAIT command pauses for count seconds or until the user types any key before continuing to the next command If the WAIT comm
194. he dialog box in Figure 4 3 appears Save Memory x Memory Space gt y Start Address End Address File Name 4 J gt File Cancel Apply Figure 4 3 Saving a COFF cld File Under Memory Space select the memory to save Under Start Address type the beginning address of the memory block Under End Address type the last address of the memory block Under File Name type in the filename of the file to save or click on File to browse for the file The extension default is cld Click OK If no directory path is specified the file will be saved in the working directory If the file already exists you will be prompted to decide whether to overwrite the file or to append it The Debugger does not store symbolic debug information Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Object Module Format 4 4 2 To Save an OMF lod File From the File menu choose Save then select Memory OMF Under Memory Space select the memory to save Under Start Address type the beginning address of the memory block Under End Address type the last address of the memory block AR WN o Under File Name type in the filename of the file to save or click on File to browse the directories The extension default is lod 6 Click OK If no directory path is specified the file will be saved in the working d
195. he expression is false no action is taken and program execution continues Be aware that a side effect of evaluating an expression whether it is true or false is that the program will not be executed in real time 8 Under Action select what action is taken when the breakpoint is encountered Table 3 1 Software Breakpoint Actions Breakpoint Resulting Action Halt Stops program execution when the breakpoint is encountered Note Displays the breakpoint expression in the Session window each time it is true Program execution continues The display in the Session window is not updated until program execution stops Show Displays the enabled register memory set Program execution continues Command Executes a Debugger command at the breakpoint Device execution commands such as TRACE or GO will not execute Increment n Increments the n counter by one 9 If the action specified is to execute a command under Command type the Debugger command 10 Click OK Motorola Controlling Execution 3 11 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Types of Software Breakpoints 3 6 2 To Clear a Software Breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Clear The Clear Breakpoints dialog box shown in Figure 2 7 on page 2 14 displays a list of all the current breakpoints 2 Select the breakpoint you want removed so that it is highli
196. he number of lines or instructions to step 5 Click OK Notice that the values in the register window the memory window and all other Debugger windows are updated after the last line or instruction is executed As an alternative you can use the STEP Button on the toolbar to step one instruction or line at a time Using the step command from the command line is covered in section 13 39 STEP Step Through DSP Program on page 13 46 of Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference 3 3 Trace the Execution of Instructions You can look at a snap shot of the enabled registers and memory after each instruction or line is executed by tracing program execution 3 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Trace the Execution of Instructions 3 3 1 To Trace Program Execution 1 From the Execute menu choose Trace The dialog box in Figure 3 3 appears Device Count m Increment a Lines C Instructions Cancel Apply Figure 3 3 Trace Program Execution 2 Under Device select the device on which you are debugging 3 Under Increment select whether to trace each line or instruction You can only specify lines if the object code includes debugging information 4 Under Count specify the total number of lines or instructions to trace Execution will stop after this number of lines instructions
197. he same name the only way to access files after the first file encountered in the search path is to specify the full path explicitly in the input filename base If a match is found the filename return buffer retn contains the fully specified filename retn is used as working storage and will be changed whether or not a match is found This function returns TRUE if the file is found FALSE otherwise See Example 14 55 Motorola Library Functions 14 51 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 55 dsp_spath find required file on search path include simcom h include protocom h int devn status char full_name 80 devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 sim_docmd devn path c work temp set up working directory sim_docmd device_index path c work bin and alternate source path find first occurrence of myfile on path status dsp_spath myfile lod full_name 14 2 56 dsp_startup tnitialize DSP Structures include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_startup dsp_startup initializes general DSP structures which are not device specific It should be called once and only once during program initialization before any calls to ads_startup and dsp_new See Example 14 56 Example 14 56 d
198. he time field Each time at is encountered you will be prompted for a single data value from the terminal Hexadecimal is the default input radix If you just type the return key at the prompt without entering a data value the previous data value will be repeated If you type the esc key at the prompt an end of file status will be simulated and the previous data value will repeat forever You can find more information about changing the radix in Section 7 3 Changing the Radix on page 7 5 6 2 Assigning an Input File You can pass simulated data to the target system by providing an input file The simulated data is written from an input file that you provide to an address that you specify There is some preparation that you must perform outside of the Debugger in order for the data from the input file to be written properly You will need to place a debug instruction in your program and you will need to set designators in certain registers You need to do this so that the Debugger knows when to perform the data transfer from where to get the data how much data to get and where to put the data 6 2 1 To Prepare for Input Data to be Received 1 Write to the appropriate register a designator that will indicate the input file number and the word count of the data that you want to input You will assign the input file number of the input file later when you open it The register to which you write this information depends on the targ
199. he user code to retain the addresses of the DEBUG instructions and carry out the desired checks and actions when they are encountered In the first two possibilities no special action is needed to continue program execution A call to dsp_go or dsp_step will resume device execution at the location following the DEBUG instruction Although inappropriate for production code this approach is simple With the third approach it is necessary to restore the original instruction before continuing and then reinstate the breakpoint as necessary The full operation of setting and handling the breakpoint is outlined below Save contents of breakpoint location s Overwrite with DEBUG instruction s Start execution with call to dsp_go Repeatedly call dsp_check_service_request until return value is TRUE Save registers with ads_cache_registers Read pc address po OY ee os Oe ie a Check for breakpoint address and carry out required checks and actions Motorola Library Functions 14 67 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Multiple Device Emulation 8 Write the saved instruction word back to memory 9 Reset the pc register to the breakpoint address 10 Execute 1 instruction with dsp_step 11 Repeatedly call dsp_check_service_request until return value is TRUE 12 Continue from 2 above Note This is only a general outline and may need
200. hift left operator causes the left operand to be shifted to the left by the number of bits specified by the right operand The sign bit will be replicated Shift operators cannot be applied to floating point operands 10 6 5 Relational Operators less than lt greater than gt equal or less than or equal lt greater than or equal gt not equal Relational operators all work the same way If the indicated condition is true the result of the expression is an integer 1 If it is false the result of the expression is an integer 0 For example if D has a value of 3 and E has a value of 5 then the result of the expression D lt E is 1 and the result of the expression D gt E is 0 Each operand of the conditional operators can be either floating point or integer Test for equality involving floating point values should be used with caution since rounding error could cause unexpected results 10 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Operators in Expressions 10 6 6 Logical Operators Logical AND amp amp Logical OR ll The logical AND operator returns an integer if both of its operands are non zero otherwise it returns an integer 0 The logical OR operator returns an integer 1 if either of its operands is non zero otherwise it returns an integer 0 The types of the operands may be either integer
201. ick OK The command macro is now saved and can be replayed or edited Motorola Macros Scripts and Log Files 9 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Logging Output from the Session Window 9 1 2 To Run a Command Macro 1 From the File menu choose Macro 2 Specify the file to run and click Open The command macro begins The commands are displayed in the Command window as they are executed The commands are also echoed in the Session window along with any output that is generated You can stop the execution of the command macro by choosing Stop from the Execute menu or by clicking on the Stop button on the tool bar You can find more information about program exection in Section 3 12 Pausing Execution with Wait on page 3 24 and in Section 3 14 Stopping Program Execution on page 3 26 To use command macros from the command line see Section 13 30 LOG Log Commands or Session Output on page 13 37 9 2 Logging Output from the Session Window You can log all output that is displayed in the Session window This is especially useful 1f you are trying to capture information that might span several screens 9 2 1 To Log Output Displayed in the Session Window 1 From the File menu choose Log then select Session 2 Specify the filename that you want to give the log file and click OK All output that is echoed in the Session window will now also be written t
202. iconductor Inc HOST Change HOST Interface Address Invoking the command with a command name causes a summary of that command s parameters with a brief description and example to be displayed on the screen If no command name parameter is included the entire command set is displayed The HELP command may also be used to review the register names and bit descriptions of peripheral control registers Invoking the command with a register name causes the register contents of the default or selected target DSP address to be displayed on the screen Help for a particular command can also be obtained by entering the command and a question mark Example 13 23 HELP Command Command Explanation help Display a summary of the available commands with their arguments help a Display a summary of the ASM command its arguments and some examples help dvl omr Display a description of the OMR bits of target DSP address 1 help oscr Display a description of the OSCR bits of the default target DSP address break Display a summary of the BREAK command its arguments and some examples 13 26 HOST Change HOST Interface Address HOST IO PC IO addr TIMEOUT value The HOST command allows the user to reconfigure the Host Interface card I O address or set the time out count for interaction with ADMs or target systems The I O address may be started at 100 200 or 300 only on the IBM PC interface
203. ify a line number of a particular source file include the filename For example to execute until line number 20 of a source file named clrmem cld located in the working directory type clrmem 20 3 Click OK Using until from the command line is covered in section 13 45 UNTIL Step Until Address on page 13 50 3 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Software Breakpoints 3 6 Software Breakpoints Software breakpoints are used to specify that a particular action be taken whenever a certain condition is met In this way software breakpoints are very similar to hardware breakpoints However software breakpoints are more limited than hardware breakpoints in that e software breakpoints can only be set on the first word of an instruction they cannot be set to detect the access of registers or data memory e software breakpoints must be set in RAM they cannot be set in ROM Despite the above limitations it is recommended that you use software breakpoints instead of hardware breakpoints whenever possible Why Because effectively only one hardware breakpoint can be set at a time whereas a virtual unlimited number of software breakpoints can be set Motorola Controlling Execution 3 9 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Software Breakpoints 3 6 1 To Set
204. igned long address Address of first location to write unsigned long count Number of locations to write unsigned long value Address of buffer of values to write LN dspd_cc_write_memory writes a block of memory starting at address address length count in memory space mem_space on Command Converter device_index The values read are retrieved from the buffer pointed to by value Valid values for mem_space are e DSP_CC_PMEM program memory e DSP_CC_XMEM X data memory e DSP_CC_YMEM Y data memory The return value is DSP_OK for success DSP_ERROR if the transaction fails See Example 14 10 Motorola Library Functions 14 15 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 10 dspd_cc_write_memory Write memory block to Command Converter include simcom h include driver h include cc h int devn status unsigned long write_addr write_len unsigned long write_buf devn 0 write buf unsigned long dsp_alloc 100 sizeof unsigned long get_values_in write_buf 1001 fetch values to write write_addr 0x04001 write_len 1001 SE en eee ree Regt a R e buf 14 2 11 dspd_check_service_request Check for Service Request include simcom h include driver h in in dspd_check_service_request device_index device_ind
205. ile currently exists with the filename specified the user will be prompted for an action of either appending the data to the file overwriting the file or aborting the command The selection of the file action may be included in the command line using the o overwrite a append or the c cancel argument Example 13 30 LOG Command Command Explanation log Display currently opened log files log s Log all display entries to filename session1 log in directory debugger sessionl debugger log c macrol Log all commands to filename macro1 cmd log off c Terminate command logging log off Terminate all logging log c macrol a Log all commands to filename macro1 cmd If a file with that name currently exists cancel the execution of the command 13 31 MORE Enable Disable Session Paging MORE OFF 13 38 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc NEXT Step Through Subroutine Calls or Macros The MORE command allows the user to enable or disable the paging of data on the session window This is particularly useful when displaying large amounts of data and you wish to examine the data page by page The paging feature is turned off by default and data will scroll vertically across the screen when it is larger than the size of the screen Example 13 31 MORE Command more Turn on session displa
206. ile program or command macro execution is in progress Keep in mind that if you began the execution by providing an until condition then this temporary breakpoint will be cleared In the Assembly window and the Source window if applicable the next instruction to be executed is highlighted in red When program execution is stopped the Session window will display Simulation aborted Notice that the values in the Session window the Register window the Memory window and all other Debugger windows are updated to reflect the last instruction or line that was executed As an alternative you can also use the Stop button on the toolbar to stop program execution For more information related to using stop see section 3 5 Providing an Until Condition and section 5 1 Resetting the Device Registers on page 5 1 To use stop from the command line see section 3 14 Stopping Program Execution 3 26 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 4 Object Files and Data Files This chapter describes how to set and change the path of the working directory and how to load and save object files 4 1 Displaying the Current Path The Suite56 DSP Debugger makes use of two types of paths for saving and accessing files e the working directory e alternate directories The working directory is the default directory the Debugger
207. imcom h include driver h int dspd_write_memory device_index mem_space address count value int device_index Index of DSP device affected by command int mem_space Memory space to write unsigned long address Address of first location to write unsigned long count Number of locations to write unsigned long value Pointer to area holding memory values ct cc dspd_write_memory writes count words of memory in the DSP device The values are taken from the buffer pointed to by value Valid values for mem_space are e P_MEM program memory e X_MEM X data memory e Y_MEM Y data memory The return value is set to DSP_OK if the operation succeeds DSP_ERROR if it fails See Example 14 21 Motorola Library Functions 14 25 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 21 dspd_write_memory Write DSP memory block include simcom h include driver h int devn status unsigned long x_mem_buf 0x100 devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dspd_write memory devn X_MEM 0x04001 0x01001 x mem buf 0 14 2 22 dspd write once _registers Write OnCE Registers to DSP Device include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int dspd_write once _registers device_index reg_nu
208. include driver h include cc h int dspd_read_memory device_index mem_space address count value int device_index Command Converter affected by command int mem_space Memory space to read unsigned long address Address of first location to read unsigned long count Number of locations to read unsigned long value Address of buffer to receive read values CT CT dspd_cc_read_memory reads a block of memory starting at address address length count in memory space mem_space on Command Converter device_index The values read are stored in the buffer pointed to by value Valid values for mem_space are e DSP_CC_PMEM DSP_CC_XMEM DSP_CC_YMEM The return value is DSP_OK for success DSP_ERROR if the transaction fails See Example 14 6 Example 14 6 dspd_cc_read_memory Read memory block from Command Converter include simcom h include driver h include cc h int devn status unsigned long read_addr read_len unsigned long read_buf devn 0 read_buf unsigned long dsp_alloc 100 sizeof unsigned long read_addr 0x04001 read_len 1001 status dspd_cc_read memory devn DSP_CC_PMEM read_addr read_len read_bu f 14 12 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 7 dspd_cc_reset
209. indow is also a useful source of information in that it echoes the commands from the menu bar and from the toolbar It also provides a source of history The command history buffer holds the ten most recent commands If the last command is repeated exactly the duplicate is not stored To display the Command window 1 From the Windows menu choose Command See the Command window in Figure 12 2 command history Command of E wasm e weommand help help pin command line help io help l device number asm break change copy device disassemble lt space gt more Figure 12 2 Command Window 2 Notice that the device number is indicated This is the device to which the commands are applied In order to affect another device the default device must be changed The command window also provides access to device specific information such as pin and port information Motorola Displayed Information 12 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Session Window To display device specific information 1 From the command line of the Command window type help 2 A list of help topics is displayed in the Session Window Check the list for the device specific information that you are wanting You might have to scroll back up the Session window to see the whole list From the command line of the Command window type help followed by the name of the he
210. ing execution the status bar in the lower left corner of the Debugger window shows the number of the device where execution is taking place the PC program counter and the cycle count updated every 1 000 cycles As an alternative you can start program execution using the GO button located on the toolbar For more information see section 5 1 Resetting the Device Registers Also see section 13 24 GO Execute DSP Program in Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference 3 2 Step Through Instructions You can specify the number of instructions or lines that you would like the Debugger to execute before stopping Performing a step through instructions is similar to performing a trace except that the display of the registers and memory blocks occurs only after the specified number of lines or instructions have been executed Executing instructions with step is also similar to executing the next instruction The important difference between using step as opposed to next is the way subroutines and macros are handled Remember that for the Debugger to recognize macros the symbolic debug information for the source code must have been included when it was compiled If one of the instructions being stepped through calls a subroutine or begins execution of a macro the instructions of the subroutine or macro are counted towards the number of instructions that have been stepped Some developers refer to this as stepping through the
211. ing register values dspd_write_core_registers writes count core registers starting at reg_num to target device device_index The values written are taken from the memory pointed to by value The order of the registers is specified in the header file adsregX X h Some registers for example the a register may be considered to be an entity in its own right or a number of smaller registers that is a0 al and a2 Such registers require an element in the value array for the compound register and one for each of its component parts The value for the compound register is ignored Each of the component values is loaded thereby changing the value of the compound register The function returns DSP_OK on success DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 20 14 24 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 20 dspd_write_core registers Write core registers include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int devn status unsigned long core_reg_values 15 devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structures for device 0 a 56002 write all core registers from buffer status dspd_write_core_registers devn ADS_A 151 core_reg_values 14 2 21 dspd_write_memory Write to Memory in DSP Device include s
212. iod or by using the LIST command without a parameter Example 13 28 LIST Command Command Explanation list 20 List source or assembly corresponding to line 20 of the current source file list test asm 20 List source or assembly corresponding to line 20 of the source file test asm list test asm List source or assembly corresponding to line 1 of the source file test asm list Display the next page of the current source file or assembly list Display source or assembly corresponding to the current execution address list Display the previous page of the current source file or assembly list lab_1 List source or assembly corresponding to symbolic address lab_1 13 29 LOAD Load DSP Files LOAD dev_list B byte wide address_offset from file LOAD dev_list S state M memory only D debug symbols only from file The LOAD command transfers DSP Macro Assembler object files to the target DSP memory The object module format OMF is defined in Appendix A the Common Object File Format COFF is defined in Appendix B Programs are loaded into the memory map and address specified by each data record A directory path may be specified with the filename If only the file parameter is specified then the user interface program assumes that the file is an OMF file The object file may be in either the special ASCII OMF format or in the DSP COFF format generate
213. ion See Example 14 61 Example 14 61 dsp _ wmem Write a zero value to address P 200 in device 0 include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h int devn unsigned long address memval address 200L memval 0L devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 dsp_wmem devn memory_map_p address amp memval1 14 2 62 dsp_wmem_b1k Write DSP Memory Block include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h dsp_wmem_b1k device_index memory_map address count value int device_index DSP device to be affected by command enum memory_map memory_map memory designator unsigned long address DSP memory address to write unsigned long count Number of locations to write unsigned long value Pointer to value to write to memory location dsp_wmem_b1k writes count locations starting at address in memory space memory_map in device device_index with values taken from the memory block pointed to by value If memory_map implies a two word value the values will be retrieved from value in order with the low order half of the first word followed by the high order half then the low order half of the second word etc Thus for word n counting from 0 in the memory block the low order value is taken from value 2 n the high order value from value 2 nt 1 The memory_map parameter selects the approp
214. ion 000103 p3 0256 wasm 000104 p3 0257 path C DSPtools software examples 000105 p3 0258 Device is not in debug mode 000106 p3 0259 force s 000107 p3 0260 load C DSPtools software examples matmul cld 000108 p3 0261 Loading file C DSPtools software examples matmul cld 00010a p3 0263 wwatch wini p1 p2 00010c p3 0265 wmemory p 0 8 fFf Fff pe pi or pr depending upon 000104 p3 0266 wregister core 00010e p3 0267 anni nt na NAa coc _ Command Ol Dy00 Source load C DSPtools software examples matmul cld src matmul asm 14 pc matmul wwatch windt pl p2 14 p3 equ 3 wmemory p 0 O ffffFE pe pi or pr depending upon address and omr value 45 wregister core 16 org p 18 17 move 86 18 move 86 19 move c6 asm break cchange cdisplay cforce cgo lt space gt more 2 move Hp1xp 21 move Hp1xp Dy00 Watch Winl 22 move Hp2xp E Value 23 move p3 n H pl p2 000006 SE move Hp3 n 26 do p3 1 27 do p2 1 DvO00 Memo e Ed Dv00 Reais Elz Ea 28 clear element acc Figure 2 4 A Typical Session Window Using the Suite56 Debugger For more information about customizing your work environment see section 7 5 Changing and Saving Window Preferences on page 7 8 and section 11 Debugger Toolbar on page 11 1 Motorola Getting Started 2 9 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc
215. irectory If the file already exists you will be prompted to decide whether to overwrite the file or to append it For more information about object files see Section 2 3 Loading Object Files on page 2 5 To save an OMF file from the command line see Section 13 38 SAVE Save Memory To File on page 13 45 4 5 Object Module Format The DSP Object Module Format OMF is an ASCII file that can be produced by the Debugger Motorola s Suite56 DSP Simulator and also by versions of the Suite56 DSP Assembler prior to release 4 0 An OMF filename uses the lod extension An OMF file consists of variable length text records Records can be defined with a fixed number of fields or can contain repeating instances of a given field such as instructions or data Motorola Object Files and Data Files 4 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Common Object File Format 4 6 Common Object File Format The Motorola Suite56 DSP assembler and linker produce a binary object file in a modified form of the AT amp T Common Object File Format COFF The DSP common object file format can also be produced by the Debugger when saving object files A COFF filename uses the cld extension COFF is a formal definition for the structure of machine code files It originated with Unix System V but has sufficient flexibility and generality to be useful in non hosted environments In particular
216. is Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions lod format In order to specify a COFF format file the filename suffix must be cld A filename with any other suffix is assumed to be in lod format This is a lower level function that does not invoke the user interface modules for pathname and automatic lod suffix extension The entire pathname must be specified The function returns 1 if the load is successful 0 if an error occurred loading the file See Example 14 45 Example 14 45 dsp_1dmem Create DSP device structures for a three device emulation include simcom h include protocom h int int devn err for devn 0 devn lt 3 devn dsp_new devn 56002 Create new DSP structures Load device 1 with a program named filter2 lod err dsp_ldmem 1 c p42 bin filter2 lod 14 2 46 dsp_load Load All DSP Structures from State File include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_load filename char filename Full name of State File to be loaded dsp_load loads the emulator state of all devices from a specified emulator state file filename It is not necessary to allocate the device structures prior to calling dsp_load This function does not invoke the user interface modules for pathname and automatic adm suffix extension the entire filename must be specified dsp_load returns 1 if the loa
217. is false program execution continues Be aware that a side effect of evaluating an expression whether it is true or false is that the program will not be executed in real time See Using Expressions in Breakpoints for more information The optional parameter count represents the number of times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before performing the action For example if you set the count to 3 the breakpoint will be triggered the third time that the breakpoint is encountered Keep in mind that real time execution will be affected if you set the Count to more than one The optional parameter action indicates the action to be taken when the breakpoint is triggered If no action is provided Halt will be assumed as the default Possible actions are Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 11 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints H Halt Stops program execution when the breakpoint is encountered N Note Displays the breakpoint expression in the Session window each time it is true Program execution continues The display in the Session window is not updated until program execution stops S Show Displays the enabled register memory set Program execution continues In Increment Increments the CNTn counter by one where n equals 1 2 or 3 Hardware Breakpoints The optional parameter dev_1 ist represents the device or
218. lar action be taken whenever a certain condition is met In this way software breakpoints are very similar to hardware breakpoints However software breakpoints are more limited than hardware breakpoints in that e software breakpoints can only be set on the first word of an instruction they cannot be set to detect the access of registers or data memory e software breakpoints must be set in RAM they cannot be set in ROM Despite the above limitations it is recommended that you use software breakpoints instead of hardware breakpoints whenever possible Why Because effectively only one hardware breakpoint can be set at a time whereas a virtually unlimited number of software breakpoints can be set Motorola Getting Started 2 11 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints 2 6 1 To Set a Software Breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Set Software The Set Breakpoints dialog box shown in Figure 2 6 appears Set Breakpoint x Type First Condition Action Type Access Address Qualifier a Halt Note mE C Read e Equal El C Write C Not Equal C Show Read Write Greater Than Command Memory Space eer kes Than C Increment CNT1 p y C Increment CNT2 C Increment CNT3 Address C Increment CNT 4 Option e And C Or a Command C Only
219. ld be the following Example 13 9 CSTEP Command in a Macro cstep 2 sexecute 2 OnCE commands then show XPTR and YPTR cdisplay x 80 90 y 80 9f display the Command Converter x and y memory display display the target registers 13 13 CTRACE Trace Through OnCE Sequence CTRACE dev_list count The CTRACE command allows the user to single step through a OnCE command sequence in the Command Converter Y memory pointed at by the Command Converter YPTR This enables the user to write and debug OnCE command sequences using the Command Converter monitor program sequence format Note that the OPDBR and OPILR registers always display the last values stored after executing a GO STEP or TRACE command or after servicing a breakpoint The values of these registers will not reflect the changes made to them when executing the CGO CSTEP or CTRACE when doing a display of the OnCE registers Also it is important to remember that writing to the OPDBR register is in effect manipulating the DSP program controller Whenever 2 word opcodes are being written to the OPDBR it is best to CTRACE or CSTEP 2 before displaying registers Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 19 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc CHANGE Change Register or Memory Value Example 13 10 CTRACE Command ctrace 10 Executes 10 OnCE serial commands of the default Command Converter and displays the OnCE register
220. le admout io for logging of device 2 outputs Note p 300 is the address where the DEBUG opcode is to reside output dv2 off Close file currently open for device 2 outputs output p 500 outfile io rd Open file outfile io for logging of default device outputs in decimal radix Note p 500 is the address where the DEBUG opcode is to reside output 2 p 700 term Open file number 2 for the current device as the terminal Note p 700 is the address where the DEBUG opcode will reside 13 34 PATH Define File Directory Path PATH dev_list pathname PATH pathname pathname PATH The PATH command allows the user to pre define a directory path for file I O for each target DSP address This enables the user to effectively partition data files for each target DSP address in their appropriate subdirectory Once a file is opened for INPUT OUTPUT SAVE or LOGging subsequent changes to the path will not affect the opened file To change the path the file must be closed and reopened with the new path name The user may still override the default path by explicitly specifying a pathname as a prefix to the filename in any of the commands which reference a file 13 42 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc QUIT Quit Debugger Session Alternate source pathnames may be specified using the PATH
221. le 13 27 Examples of Terminal Input Within an Input File t 30 Request the next thirty input values from the user interactively or until an ESCAPE character is entered All input values are to come from the user interactively until ESC is pressed For more information see Section 6 3 Examples of How to Assign an Input File on page 6 7 13 28 LIST List Source File Lines LIST addr The LIST command displays source lines or disassembled instructions from the specified source file or beginning at the specified address The current display mode determines whether a source file or assembly mnemonics will be displayed If the Debugger is in the Register display mode this command will switch it to the Source display mode and display the source file lines associated with the specified address or line number If the display mode is already source or assembly the display mode is not altered The Assembly display mode displays disassembled instructions corresponding to the specified address or line number Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 35 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc LOAD Load DSP Files The next or previous pages of the currently displayed source file may be selected by specifying or rather than a specific address or line number In addition the source or assembly associated with the current execution address may be selected by specifying per
222. list of devices on which the breakpoints will be set The optional parameter bn represents a breakpoint number Breakpoint numbers do not have to be consecutive they can be assigned arbitrarily For example it may be convenient to allocate breakpoints so that one function is assigned breakpoints 1 to 10 another uses 11 to 20 and so on If no breakpoint number is assigned the default will be the next available consecutive number The optional parameter access represents the kind of access that the breakpoint should detect r read w write rw read or write at the address that you will specify The optional parameter hwbp_type refer to the hardware breakpoint type Breakpoint types are device specific See the list of Types of Hardware Breakpoints for an explanation of each type of breakpoint The parameter addr _block represents the address where the software breakpoint is set An address block can also be provided in which case an access of any address in the range of addresses will be detected by the breakpoint For example to set a breakpoint that covers address 103 to 110 in p memory type p 103 110 The optional parameter t expression represents a test of the expression within the parentheses If the expression is true the breakpoint will cause the action to be performed 13 12 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc
223. lp topic For example to list the on chip io registers and their addresses on the command line type help io The help information is displayed in the Session window Some of this information can be lengthy so it might be useful to log the Session window output For more information about the command window and its usage see Section 1 4 Entering Commands on page 1 7 Section 2 4 Setting Up the Display Environment on page 2 7 Section 7 2 Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 and Section 9 2 Logging Output from the Session Window on page 9 2 12 4 Session Window The Session window is the main output for the Debugger The Session window displays an echo of all commands input at the command line from the Command Window output from commands information from the Display menu views of source code and assembly code values in registers and memory locations at breakpoints values in registers and memory locations after execution is halted and error messages During a typical session the window might look like the one in Figure 12 3 12 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Session Window output resulting from displaying Version Dy00 Session MOTOROLA DSP5S6366 SIMULATOR VERSION 6 1 36 12 31 97 display a a0 000000 output resulting from p c66666 000000 nop displaying co
224. lt less than or equal to II logical or equal to logical negate gt greater than or equal to amp bitwise and gt greater than bitwise or l not equal to 2 bitwise one s complement addition A bitwise exclusive or subtraction lt lt shift left division gt gt shift right Motorola Controlling Execution 3 23 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Pausing Execution with Wait Register names can also be used in the expression A breakpoint expression usually involves comparison of register or memory values C expressions can also be used Remember to enclose C expressions in curly bracket c_expression You can find more information about expressions in Chapter 10 Expressions You can find more information about setting breakpoints in section 3 6 Software Breakpoints on page 3 9 and section 3 8 Hardware Breakpoints on page 3 16 3 12 Pausing Execution with Wait You can pause program execution by specifying the number of seconds you want the Debugger to wait Execution resumes after the pause This is particularly useful when writing a command macro That is if you cause the Debugger to wait while logging commands you can then save the log file A command macro results The pause that was recorded while logging commands will be replayed when the macro is e
225. m count value int device_index Index of DSP device affected by command int reg_num First once register to write unsigned long count Number of registers to write unsigned long value Pointer to area holding register values tor dspd_write_once_registers writes count OnCE registers starting at register reg_num to the target device device_index The values written are taken from the memory pointed to by value The order of the registers is specified in the header file adsregXX h The function returns DSP_OK on success DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 22 Example 14 22 dspd write _ once _registers Write once registers include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int devn status unsigned long once_reg_values 15 devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 write all OnCE registers from buffer status dspd_write_once_registers devn OSCR 151 once_reg_values 14 26 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 23 dspt_masm_xxxxx Assemble DSP Mnemonic include proto56n h n k 1 3 8 include proto96k h int dspt_masm_xxxxx mnemonic ops error_ptr char mnemonic Pointer to assembler mnemonic string unsigned long ops
226. m the command line see Section 13 34 PATH Define File Directory Path on page 13 42 4 3 Loading Object Files You can load DSP Object Module Format OMF files or Common Object File Format COFF files directly into the Debugger memory OMF files are identified by the lod extension COFF files are identified by the cld extension The Motorola Suite56 DSP Assembler generates both file formats You can also generate both of the file formats with the DSP Debugger when saving object files 4 3 1 To Load a COFF cld File 1 From the File menu choose Load then select Memory COFF 2 Under Load select memory debug symbols or both The Debugger will process the symbol and line number information contained in a COFF format object file cld file only if the file was compiled or assembled with debugging enabled In the Motorola DSP Assembler this is represented by the g option If symbol information has been loaded the evaluator will accept symbol names or source file line numbers and translate them into an associated memory address 3 Under Filename specify the filename of the object file to load or click on the File button to browse for the file 4 Click OK If the cld file is not found in the selected directory the Debugger will try to load the file from the working directory If the file does not exist in the working directory the Debugger will try to load the file from the alternate directories An error message is
227. mand enum memory_map memory_map memory designator unsigned long address DSP memory address to read unsigned long return_value Returned memory value or values dsp_rmem reads the contents of a selected DSP memory location specified by memory_map and address and writes it to return_value If the memory_map implies a two word value the least significant word will be returned to return_value and the most significant word will be returned to the return_value 1 location This function also returns a flag that indicates whether or not the memory location exists It returns 1 if the location exists 0 otherwise The memory_map parameter selects the appropriate dt_memory structure from dt_var mem for the selected device These structures are described in the simdev h file which is included with the emulator The memory_map parameter can be obtained with the function dsp_findmenm by using the memory name as a key Use the emulator help mem command for a list of valid memory names The memory_map enum is memory_map_ concatenated with a valid memory name As an example memory_map_ pa refers to off chip pa memory on the 96002 device See Example 14 51 Example 14 51 dsp_rmem Read X memory location 100 from device 0 include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h unsigned long address unsigned long memval int devn int ok devn 0 dsp_new de
228. mand cchange dv2 x 0 Display the current value of X 0 of Command Converter 2 memory and prompt the user for a new value Subsequent values may be displayed or changed by entering a carriage return To exit this interactive mode use the escape key echange y 0 10 0 Change the y 0 through y 10 of the default Command Converter to a value of 0 Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 15 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc CDISPLAY Display Command Converter Flags and Memory 13 7 CDISPLAY Display Command Converter Flags and Memory CDISPLAY dev_list FLAG XPTR YPTR address _block The CDISPLA Y command allows you to examine the Command Converter flag register Y memory pointer or the P X or Y memory values used to transfer OnCE serial command sequences to the target DSP These values are displayed in hexadecimal in the Session window Command converter X memory locations 0 to 10 hex are used for temporary storage of flags and constants Example 13 3 CDISPLAY Commands cdisplay flag Display the Command Converter flag register The flag register is used to store status bits of whether the target DSP is in the Debug mode or User mode as well as other Command Converter monitor flags cdisplay y 0 10 Display the Command Converter Y memory space which is used for the OnCE command sequence transfers to the target DSP cdisplay xptr Display the X memory pointe
229. map parameter selects the appropriate dt_memory structure from dt_var mem for the selected device These structures are described in the simdev h file The memory_map parameter can be obtained with the function dsp_findmem by using the memory name as a key Use the emulator help mem command for a list of valid memory names The memory_map enum is memory_map_ concatenated with a valid memory name See Example 14 52 Example 14 52 dsp _rmem bl1k Read 20 X memory locations starting at 100 from device 0 include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h unsigned long address unsigned long count unsigned long memval 20 int devn int ok devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 address 100L count 20L ok dsp_rmem devn memory_map_x address count amp memval 0 Motorola Library Functions 14 49 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 53 dsp_rreg Read a DSP Device Register include simcom h include protocom h dsp_rreg device_index periph_num reg_num reg_val int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command int periph_num DSP peripheral number int reg_num DSP register number unsigned long reg_val Return register value goes here CT CT dsp_rreg reads a register spe
230. mbers Source window information Dv00 Source src matmul asm 14 pc matmul asm 17 pi 166 lt p3 253 gt section global 15 16 org p 166 17 move 80 r 0 Set up r8 to point to matrix A 18 move 80 r 4 Set up r4 to point to matrix B 19 move c6 r2 Set up r2 to point to answer mi 26 move Hp1x p2 1 m8 Set up modulo pixp2 for matrix 21 move Hp1x p3 1 m4 Set up modulo p1xp3 for matrix 22 move Hp2x p3 1 m2 Set up modulo p2xp3 for matrix 23 move Hp3 n2 Set up affset nt to p3 H of ci 24 Egun feo hi Sel up offset wh to r3 yf ed Figure 12 6 Source Window 2 You can use the Source window to set halt breakpoints To set or clear a breakpoint double click on any line in the Source window The breakpoint is added to the breakpoint list displayed in the breakpoint window and highlighted blue in the Assembly window The Source window and its usage are also discussed in Section 2 2 Setting and Clearing the Path on page 2 2 and Section 2 4 Setting Up the Display Environment on page 2 7 12 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Stack Window 12 7 Stack Window You can watch the call stack by opening the Stack window To display the call stack 1 From the Windows menu choose Stack The call stack will be displayed You can find more information about the stack in Chapter 8 Debugging C Source Code
231. md function interface It allows the user to simply execute the high level load or load s emulator commands to load program code or a emulator state file The non display version of the emulator makes use of the lower level function calls dsp_1dmem and dsp_load to Motorola Library Functions 14 65 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Non Display Emulator accomplish the same results They are described in Section 14 2 Library Function Descriptions The major difference from their high level counterparts is that no filename expansion is provided in the lower level calls The program code loaded by the dsp_ldmem function may be any COFF format or OMF format file The OMF format is created as the output of versions of the Macro Assembler prior to release 4 0 and of the Emulator save command The COFF format files are the output of the Macro Assembler beginning with release 4 0 or those saved by the Emulator save command with the suffix cld The Emulator state loaded by the dsp_load function may have previously been saved by a display or non display version of the emulator The formats are the same The dsp_save function is provided as a low level entry point that saves the Emulator state for a non display version of the Emulator It is the same function that is called during execution of the high level save s command which is only available in the display version The only
232. miconductor Inc Assigning an Output File Table 6 10 Designations for Memory Space and Address Registers Device Designate the Put the Address from Where Memory Space in the Data Will Be Read In Family a p Register Register DSP56000 R1 RO DSP56100 R1 RO DSP56300 R1 RO DSP56600 R1 RO DSP56800 R1 RO DSP96000 R2 R1 3 Place a debug instruction at an appropriate address in your program This is the point in the program where you want the data transfer to take place For more information see section 6 5 Examples of How to Assign an Output File Once the registers are set and the debug instruction written you can open the output file 6 4 2 To Open an Output File 1 From the File menu choose Output then select Open The dialog box in Figure 6 2 appears Open Output File x Output Number Debug Address Radix Decimal 1 um C Fractional Floatina Point To Hexadecimal E File Unsigned C Terminal C String File Name File 2 Cancel Figure 6 2 Creating an Output File 6 12 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Output File 2 Under Output Number select the number you want to assign to this output The default number that is shown is the next available number Output numbers do not have to be consecutive
233. mmand file and the commands are executed prior to checking for the optional macro command file argument The host bus to ADM interface board provides a physical link between the host computer and the ADM via a parallel data path and a control bus cable The parallel data path enables high speed data transfers The control bus signals enable the host computer to reset interrupt and send commands to ADMs simultaneously or sequentially The ADM is the basic platform for evaluating the DSP It contains a DSP chip with a JTAG OnCE interface connector to configure it as a slave to the host computer or as a 1 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Configuring the Operating Environment stand alone unit In the slave configuration the user controls the DSP processor and is able to interrogate its status This enables the user to debug hardware and software easily In the stand alone configuration a user program resident in ROM controls the ADM and may be used as a prototype system for an end product For more information see section 1 1 Features of the Debugger section 1 2 Configuring the Operating Environment section 1 3 Entering Commands and See Getting Started on page 1 1 1 Features of the Debugger Features of the Motorola DSP Debugger include the following e Single multiple stepping through DSP programs
234. mn line column text flag simw_redo device Repaint screen with output from device simw_redraw count Redraw screen after scrolling count simw_refresh Screen update after buffering output simw_scrnest Nest output buffering another level simw_unnest Pop output buffering one level simw_winit Initialize window parameters simw_wscr Write string and perform logging functions string commandflag 14 3 1 simw_ceol Clear to End of Line simw_ceol This function must clear the display from the current column to the end of line then return the cursor to the previous position 14 3 2 simw_ctrlbr Check for CtrL C Signal simw_ctrlbr This function must check for the occurrence of a Ctrl C signal from the terminal If the Ctrl C signal occurs it sets a flag for the active breakpoint DSP defined by sv_const breakdev It returns the sim_var stat CTRLBR flag for the current device This allows the program to select the device that will halt in response to the Ctrl C signal from the keyboard in a multiple device emulation Motorola Library Functions 14 61 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Emulator Screen Management Functions 14 3 3 simw_cursor Move Cursor to Specified Line and Column simw_cursor line column This function must move the cursor to the specified line and column and update the
235. mory pointed to by value The order of the registers is specified in the header file adsregX X h Note Calling order is important dspd_read_once_registers must be called before calling dspd_read_core_registers If the calling order is reversed the values in the OnCE registers will have been altered Some registers for example the a register may be too large to be held in a single location These registers are also defined as a number of smaller registers a0 al and a2 Such registers require an element in the value array for the compound register and one for each of its component parts The value returned for the compound register is undefined Each of the component values is returned and must be assembled by the calling program if the value of the compound register is required The return value is DSP_OK if the operation succeeds DSP_ERROR if it fails See Example 14 15 Example 14 15 dspd read core registers Read core registers include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int devn status unsigned long count_once buf_once 15 count_core buf _core ADSCOREMAX devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 count_once 15 all OnCE registers count_core ADSCOREMAX all core registers get OnCE first then core status dspd_read_once_registers devn OSCR count_once buf_once status dspd_read_core_registers devn ADS_
236. most in half However all of the functions listed in Section 14 3 Emulator Screen Management Functions and sim_docmd sim_gmcmd and sim_gtemd described in Sections Section 14 2 64 sim_docmd Execute Emulator User Interface Command Section 14 2 65 sim_gmcmd Get Command String from Macro File Section 14 2 66 14 64 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Non Display Emulator sim_gtcmd Get Command String from Terminal are sacrificed The remainder of the functions in Section 14 2 are available in the non display emulator libraries Some major features of the emulator are eliminated by the loss of the sim_docmd function In particular there are no low level entry points provided to set a breakpoint or to assign input or output files to DSP memory However the basic functions required to create a device load a program execute the code and test or modify device registers are all still available The use of these basic functions to support breakpoints is discussed in Section 14 4 4 Testing Breakpoint Conditions In addition the dsp_save function provides the capability to save the state of the non display version The state file can later be reloaded by a display version of the emulator for visual examination of the registers and memory contents The following sections cover several topics that co
237. n s type Keep in mind that you might need to move up or down the call stack to select the desired expression context You can also change the current context when monitoring c function calls 8 6 1 To Display The Type of a C Variable or Expression 1 From the Display menu choose Type The dialog box in Figure 8 6 appears Type EG Expression eee Cancel Apply Figure 8 6 Displaying the Type of a C Variable or Expression 2 Type in the expression Remember to enclose C expressions in curly brackets For example gi i 3 Click OK 4 The data type is displayed in the Session window If the result of the expression is a storage location for example a variable name or an element of an array the address of the storage location will be displayed in addition to its data type To display the type of a C variable from the command line see Section 13 43 TYPE Display the Result Type of a C Expression on page 13 49 Motorola Debugging C Source Code 8 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Displaying the Type of a C Expression 8 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 9 Macros Scripts and Log Files The command macro is a useful tool for performing multiple Debugger commands The command macro is useful for performing commonly re
238. n load_fname load program into memory status dsp_go_reset devn start program execution after device reset 14 2 44 dsp_init Initialize a Single DSP Device Structure include simcom h include protocom h dsp_init device_index int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command dsp_init initializes a device device_index to the same state that existed following the dsp_new call which created it It is equivalent to performing the emulator FORCE S command All memory spaces are cleared the registers are reset breakpoints and input output file assignments are cleared See Example 14 44 Example 14 44 dsp init re initialize a device include simcom h include protocom h dsp_new 0 56002 Create new DSP structure dsp_init 0 Re initialize device 0 14 2 45 dsp_ldmem Load DSP Memory from OMF or COFF File include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_ldmem device_index filename int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command char filename Full pathname of OMF format file to be loaded dsp_1dmem loads the memory space of a specified DSP device device_index from an object file filename The file may be created as the output from the DSP Macro Assembler or by using the Emulator save command it may be either COFF format or Motorola Library Functions 14 43 For More Information On Th
239. n with the WHERE DOWN and UP commands to display and traverse the C function call stack After entering a new call stack frame using FRAME that call stack frame becomes the current scope for evaluation In other words for C expressions the EVALUATE command acts as though this new frame is the proper place to start looking for variables Example 13 21 FRAME Command frame 2 Select call stack frame number two frame 0 Select call stack frame number zero innermost frame 13 24 GO Execute DSP Program GO dev_list from location R reset break_number occurrence count Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 29 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc HELP ADS Debugger Help The GO command initiates program execution of DSP code It can be used to start multiple ADMs or target systems simultaneously The Command Converter monitor passes control to the user program on the ADM or target system until a breakpoint is reached or a break is asserted with the FORCE command The GO command can be used to resume execution after a force break Invoking the command with no argument will start execution at the current program counter value Enabled break points are examined at the end of every instruction cycle If an address argument is included program execution begins at the address specified The R reset parameter will cause program execution to start from the user
240. ncern the non display version of the emulator Section 14 4 1 Creating a New Device deals with creating a new device Section 14 4 2 Loading Program Code or Device State describes how to load a program or state file Section 14 4 3 Executing Device Instructions describes how to execute device cycles Section 14 4 4 Testing Breakpoint Conditions describes how to test breakpoint conditions 14 4 1 Creating a New Device The simcom h file defines the maximum number of DSP devices in the constant DSP_MAXDEVICES A new device can be created and numbered from 0 to DSP_MAXDEVICES 1 The structures are allocated by calls to the dsp_new function described in Section 14 2 47 dsp_new Create New DSP Device Structure The following C source code illustrates the steps necessary to create 3 DSP devices Note that the numbers used for device number 0 1 2 below reflect the device numbers set up on the target hardware and do not need to be consecutive See Example 14 67 Example 14 67 Device Structures Creation ads_startup 100 ADSP56000 dsp_startup dsp_new 0 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 dsp_new 1 56002 Allocate structure for device 1 a 56002 dsp_new 2 56002 Allocate structure for device 2 a 56002 14 4 2 Loading Program Code or Device State The display version of the emulator provides the high level sim_doc
241. nd as the name of a command macro and executes the macro if it exists For more information see Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference specifically section 13 2 Command Syntax on page 13 5 Motorola Introduction 1 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Entering Commands 1 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 2 Getting Started The Motorola Suite56 DSP Debugger is designed to give you flexibility in how you debug your object code There are many approaches that you can take There is no one way in which to go about debugging your code However there are some fairly common windows and commands with which you will want to become familiar The following steps describes how to begin a typical session with the DSP debugger Typically you will want to Reset the device Set the path of the working directory Load an object file BR WO N Ra Set up the display environment by opening windows to view the source code assembly code register values and memory values Nn Use a watch list 6 Set and modify breakpoints 7 Go or step through instructions Once you are familiar with the debugger you won t need to perform each of the steps described above Instead you will probably already have your windows positioned as you like them by
242. nditional code The DEBUGcc opcode is used to indicate that the device should enter into the debug mode if the specified conditional code cc is true See Motorola DSP family manual specific to the device you are debugging for more information on the DEBUGcc and ce opcodes 3 12 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Types of Software Breakpoints Table 3 2 Software Breakpoints DEBUGcc Available on the DSP56000 DSP56100 DSP56300 and DSP56600 Breakpoint Type cc Meaning Condition Code Bit s cc or hs carry clear c 0 CS Gr Jo carry set C 1 ec extension clear E 0 eq equal 7 es extension set E ge greater or equal N xor V 0 gt greater than Z or N xor V 0 le limit clear L 0 le less or equal Zor N xor V 1 ls limit set L 1 LE less than N xor V 1 mi minus N 1 ne not equal Z 0 nr normalized Zor Not U and Not E 1 pl plus N 0 nn not normalized Zor Not U and Not E 0 al always N A not conditional and denotes the logical AND operator xor denotes the logical Exclusive OR operator or denotes the logical OR operator Motorola Controlling Execution 3 13 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Types of Software Breakpoints 3 7 2 D
243. ndow 00 2 ee eee eee 13 53 WCOMMAND GUI Command Window 0b ee eee 13 54 WHERE GUI C Call Stack Window i440 sco ara A aa 13 55 WINPUT GUI File Input Window 0 0 0 eee eee eee 13 56 WLIST GUI List Window eis 9 a noted ga a Phe eS 13 57 WMEMORY GUI Memory Window 0 002 e ee eee eee 13 58 WOUTPUT GUI File Output Window 0 0 eee eee ee 13 59 WREGISTER GUI Register Window 0 0 00 c eee eee 13 60 WSESSION GUI Session Window 02 eee eee eee 13 61 WSOURCE GUI Source Window 0 cece eee eee eee 13 62 WSTACK GUI Stack WindoWe ias as Sea aia Gees 13 63 WWATCH GUI Watch Window s5 4 424 020045964 ra Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com vii 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 viii Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 14 Library Functions ADS Object Library Piles 3 04 tat A ba Me 2 he INOS he Mewh 5 14 2 Library Function Desc pis ate ee useen eee hee ee Sons 14 7 Emulator Screen Management Functions 00 0 eee eeeee 14 60 Non Display Emulator e bth Oe ss Ls Gh ENON 14 64 Multiple Device Eolo ose eee enna peed exe kts ee Sea 14 68 Reserved Function Names 5 60 03 5440 oe a AS ee bein A PAS 14 70 Emulator Global Variables 3 0 kc havea ki bathow te dla 14 70 Modification of Emulator Global Structures 02000005 1
244. ne see see Section 13 22 FORCE Assert RESET or BREAK on Target on page 13 28 Motorola Managing Memory and Registers 5 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Displaying Register Values 5 2 Displaying Register Values You can display the device registers and memory any time instruction execution is halted 5 2 1 To Display the Value in a Register 1 From the Windows menu choose Register The dialog box in Figure 5 1 appears Open Register Window x Peripheral core gt Cancel Apply Figure 5 1 Open Register Window Dialog Box 2 Select the peripheral that you want to view 3 Click OK The register values for the peripheral that you chose appear in a register window For example if you had chosen to display the register values for the core you would see a window similar to the one in Figure 5 2 z number of device gt register number window pe of peripheral Dy00 Register Wini core OF x x 000000000000 Y 000000000000 a value of 00000000000000 b 00000000000000 register x x1 000000 xl in hexadecimal y 000000 yl a2 00 al 000000 4 b2 00 b1 000000 b at ennnnn pe esnnann 5 Figure 5 2 Displaying the Register Values 5 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Changing Regist
245. next instruction to be executed calls a subroutine or begins execution of a macro all the instructions of the subroutine or macro are executed before execution is stopped The enabled registers memory and other updated values are then displayed In order to recognize macros the symbolic debug information for the program code must be loaded The debug information is included in the COFF format cld files generated using the Motorola SuiteS6 Assembler s g option 3 4 1 To Execute the Next Program Instruction 1 From the Execute menu choose Next The dialog box in Figure 3 4 appears Device Count 1 aj Increment Lines Dv4 a f Instructions Cancel Apply Figure 3 4 Executing the Next Program Instruction 2 Under Increment select whether to execute by lines or instructions 3 Under Count specify the number of lines or instructions to execute 4 Select the checkbox labeled Halt at Breakpoints if you want breakpoints to be observed If the checkbox is not selected breakpoints will be ignored and will not halt program execution 5 Click OK 3 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Executing the Next Instruction Notice that the values in the register window the memory window and all other Debugger windows are updated after the last line or instruction is executed As an alternative y
246. ng Command Switch to use when starting the Converter System ADS Debugger comments CC UCC Win 95 98 d lt port gt where port can equal 100 200 or 300 UCC Win NT d UCC UCC indicates that a Universal Command Converter UCC is connected UCC SunOS4 d lt driver_name gt The default lt driver_name gt Solaris is dev mdsp0 HP UX 9 and The driver name will vary if HP UX 10 2 installed to a directory other than dev Parallel Port Win 95 98 NT q parallel can be 1 2 or 3 denoting LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 Ethernet all operating d ethernet lt IP hostname gt lt IP hostname gt denotes IP systems address or hostname of the command converter PCI Win 95 98 NT d pci Motorola Introduction 1 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Specifying a Command Converter The following table contains examples of switches used to launch the ADS Debugger for various command converters Example 1 1 ADS Switches for Command Converters Command Example Explanation ads56300 d 300 Launches the text version of the ADS Debugger for the DSP56300 Assuming that the Debugger is running on Win95 or Win98 the switch indicates that the command converter being used is a Universal Command Converter UCC addressed on port 300 ads56300 d UEC Launches the text version of the ADS Debugger for the DSP56300 Assuming that the Debugger is running on a Win NT operating syst
247. ng Directory Path 1 From the File menu choose Path then select Set A dialog box similar to the one in Figure 4 1 appears parent directory list of subdirectories Select Directory History Special View Volumes WinNT y moves up directory tree gds563 GUI56 MA GUIS63 moves down directory tree currently selected directory Directory GUI563 Cancel Open Figure 4 2 Setting the Working Directory Path 2 If appropriate select another drive from the Volumes menu 4 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc To Set the Working Directory Path 3 Move up or down the directory tree until the directory you want is in the list of subdirectories There are a number of ways to do this You can move up and down the directory tree with the left arrow and right arrow buttons move down the tree by double clicking in the list of subdirectories move up the tree by selecting a directory from the drop down box where the parent directory is displayed select a directory from the History menu which shows recently selected directories 4 Single click on the desired directory from the list of subdirectories so that it is highlighted Notice that the highlighted directory appears in the area labeled Directory 5 Click on Select The selected directory is now the working directory Note From th
248. ng the DISPLAY command with only a register or memory list causes immediate display of the listed registers and memory locations without affecting their enable status Several register group names have been predefined and may be used in the display list to enable disable or display all of the registers in the group The list of group names available depends on the target device For a list of the peripheral names available with a particular ADS system use the command HELP periph CAUTION Some peripheral registers contain handshake bits that change state when they are read Reading these registers can interfere with the proper operation of the peripheral within the user program Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 25 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com DOWN Move Down the C Function Call Stack Freescale Semiconductor Inc Example 13 16 DISPLAY Command Command Explanation display Display all currently enabled registers and memory of the current default target DSP address display on Enable all programming model registers for display on the current default target DSP address display p 0 300 Display p memory addresses 0 through 300 of the current default target DSP address display on p 0 20 x 30 40 Display enable p memory address block 0 to 20 x 100 x memory address block 30 to 40 and X memory g address hexadecimal 100 of the current default
249. ning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 O P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 12 Output File Assembly Code for DSP56100 Family Operation Comment MOVE S030c X0 output to file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE 100 RO write data from address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 14 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Output File 6 5 3 DSP56300 Family Output The output file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 24 bit register Indicate these by writing the File Number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 16 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 O P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 13 Output File Assembly Code for DSP56300 Family Operation Comment MOVE S03000c XO output to file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE S100 RO write data from address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 5 4 DSP56600 Family Output The output file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 16 bit register Indicate these by writing the file number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 8 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then in
250. ns 1 if the save is successful 0 if an error occurs when saving the file This function will call the function dspl_xmsave as one of the steps of saving the DSP structure See Example 14 54 14 50 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 54 dsp_save Save debugger status in file lunchbreak adm include simcom h include protocom h int ok dsp_new 0 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 dsp_new 1 56002 Allocate structure for device 1 a 56002 Save device 0 and 1 to state file lunchbrk adm ok dsp_save lunchbrk adm 14 2 55 dsp_spath Search Path for Specified File include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_spath base sufx retn char base Ptr to base file name char sufx Ptr to file extension char retn Ptr to buffer to receive completed file name dsp_spath takes the base filename base and suffix sufx supplied as arguments and searches the working directory and alternate source paths until the required file is found The working directory is searched first then each of the alternate source directories in the order in which the paths were specified The search terminates immediately if a match is found If multiple files exist on the search path with t
251. ntents of path register a0 Device Working Directory C DSPtools software examples No Alternate Source Paths output resulting from displaying evaluate p1 p2 the path Hex 6666069 Uns 00009 Fract 1 672884e 666 Bin 6666666666606 next output x 009900000090 y 009900000000 resulting from a 00990000009000 b 00990000009000 performing an x1 900000 x0 009000 r7 000000 n7 001 y1 0000998 y0 0000988 r 000990 n 90 a2 00 at e00000 a0 000000 r5 000000 n5 90 b2 90 b1 0000008 bo0 000000 rj 000000 n4 00 r3 009000 n3 00 pe c 66661 sr c00300 omr 000300 r2 000000 n2 00 output la 000008 1c 000998 r1 000098 n1 001 roman from ssh 890009 ssl 666006 sp se0066 r 0909000 n6 60 rat ep 5000000 sz 000000 sc 800008 uba 800000 iprce 666666 iprp 0000090 aarO0 000000 aar1i 000000 ber S3fFFFFF dcr 000000 aar2 000000 aar3 000000 hit 666666 miss 000000 replace 666666 cyc 000139 ictr 666661 ecnt1 000000 cnt2 666666 cnt3 666666 cnt4 Bl p c66661 009000 nop Figure 12 3 Session Window To display the Session window 1 From the Window menu choose Session 2 The Session window opens You will probably have to scroll and resize the window to be suitably visible Note that it is not possible to have more than one Session window open at a time The Session window only displays output for the current device However each device writes output to its own buffer That is a devi
252. o the log file you specified 9 2 2 To Stop Logging from the Session Window 1 From the File menu choose Log then select Close A dialog box appears 2 Mark the Session checkbox 3 Click OK 9 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 10 Expressions An expression consists of a combination of symbols constants operators and parentheses Expressions follow the conventional rules of algebra and Boolean arithmetic Expressions might contain any combination of integers floating point numbers memory space symbols and register symbols The Debugger allows the use of expressions for various purposes Expressions can be used in most places where a constant is valid For example an expression can take the place of the start and stop location in the specification of an address range Or an expression might be used to indicate the location of a breakpoint Expressions can also be used in a watch list You will find that there are various uses for expressions Motorola Expressions 10 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Evaluate Expressions 10 1 Evaluate Expressions You can evaluate DSP assembler expressions and C expressions and write the result to the Session Window 1 From the Display menu choose Evaluate The dialog box in Figure 10 1 appears Evaluate Expres
253. of the specified locations may have been changed See Example 14 26 Example 14 26 dsp_cc_fmem Initialize CC statistics buffer include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int devn fill value status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 fill value 0 dsp_cc_fmem devn DSP_CC_XMEM Oxe4101 0x201 amp fill_value 14 2 27 dsp_cc_go Start Command Converter Program Execution include simcom h include protocom h int dspd_cc_go device_index int device_index dsp_cc_go starts the Command Converter for the target device device_index executing from the address indicated by the current program counter The return value is TRUE for success FALSE otherwise See Example 14 27 Example 14 27 dsp_cc_go Start CC running include simcom h include protocom h int devn status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dspd_cc_go devn Start Command Converter monitor 14 30 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 28 dsp _cc_ldmem Load Command Converter Memory from File include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_cc_ldmem device_index loadfn int device_index Command Converter aff
254. ommand Reference For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 13 7 Freescale Semiconductor Inc ASM Single Line Interactive Assembler 13 4 ASM Single Line Interactive Assembler ASM dev_num B byte wide beginning at address assembler_mnemonic The ASM command allows you to create or edit DSP object code programs in memory using assembly language mnemonics Each line of source code is immediately converted into machine language code and stored in the Application Development Module ADM or target system memory The line of assembly source code is not saved The address parameter is optional The beginning address may be in any of the three p x or y memory maps of the DSP Note The Y memory is only valid for DSP56000 and DSP96002 family members If no address is specified assembly begins in the p program memory space using the current program counter value as the beginning address Invoking this command causes existing object code at the beginning address to be disassembled and displayed on the screen The user may optionally enter a new Assembler mnemonic on the command line or edit the existing object code The Assembler is called when the carriage return key is entered If the new instruction cannot be assembled correctly an error message is displayed on the error line and the cursor is placed at the point of error The B byte wide parameter takes one byte from each memory word starting at t
255. on On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc ADS Object Library Files Table 14 5 dsp_cc_ Command Converter Interface Routines Continued Routine Description dsp_cc_reset device Reset Command Converter dsp_cc_revision devn revstring Read Command Converter Monitor Revision dsp_cc_rmem device mtype addr value Read Command Converter Memory dsp_cc_rmem_blk device mtype addr count value Read Command Converter memory block dsp_cc_wmem device mtype addr value Write Command Converter memory dsp_cc_wmem_blk device mtype addr count value Write Command Converter memory block 14 1 2 6 ADS Interface Routines Table 14 6 lists ADS interface routines Table 14 6 dsp_ ADS Interface Routines Routine Description dsp_alloc nbytes clearmem Allocate Memory dsp_check_service_request devn Determine if device is requesting service dsp_findmem devn memname map Get map index for memory prefix dsp_findreg devn regname pval rval Get peripheral and register index dsp_fmem devn map addr blocksz val Fill memory block with a value dsp_free devn Free memory allocated for a DSP device dsp_free_mem cp Free memory block dsp_go devn Initiate program execution dsp_go address devn a
256. only logical negate Integer only The unary negate operator will return the one s complement of the following operand The unary logical negation operator will return an integer 1 if the operand following it is O and will return a O otherwise The operand must have an integer value 10 6 2 Arithmetic Operators addition subtraction multiplication division mod The divide operator applied to integer numbers produces a truncated integer result The mod operator applied to integers will yield the remainder from the division of the first expression by the second If the mod operator is used with floating point operands the mod operator will apply the following rules Y Z Yif Z2 0 X if Z lt gt 0 where X has the same sign as Y is less than Z and satisfies the relationship Y i Z X where 1 is an integer Motorola Expressions 10 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Operators in Expressions 10 6 3 Bitwise Operators Binary AND amp Integer only inclusive OR l Integer only exclusive OR Integer only Bitwise operators cannot be applied to floating point operands 10 6 4 Shift Operators Binary shift right gt gt Integer only shift left lt lt Integer only The shift right operator causes the left operand to be shifted to the right and zero filled by the number of bits specified by the right operand The s
257. onverter for DSP family dspd_cc_read_ flag devn flag value Read Command Converter flag word dspd_cc_read_memory devn mem addr count value Read from Command Converter memory dspd_cc_reset devn Reset Command Converter dspd_cc_revision devn revstring Read Command Converter revision number dspd_cc_write_flag devn flag value Write Command Converter flag word dspd_cc_write_memory devn mem addr count value Write to Command Converter memory 14 1 2 3 Driver Level Routines Table 14 3 lists driver level routines Table 14 3 dspd_ Driver Level Routines Routine Description dspd break devn command Force running DSP into debug mode dspd_check_service_request devn See if DSP is requesting service from host dspd_fill_memory devn mem addr count value Initialize DSP memory buffer to single value dspd_go devn opcode operand Begin execution on target DSP device dspd_jtag_reset devn reset_type Reset JTAG communications dspd_read_core_registers devn reg_num count value Read core registers from DSP device Motorola Library Functions 14 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc ADS Object Library Files Table 14 3 dspd_ Driver Level Routines Continued Routine Description
258. ory devn X_MEM 0x00001 0Ox01001 x mem buf Motorola Library Functions 14 21 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 17 dspd_read_once_registers Read OnCE Registers from DSP Device include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int dspd_read_once_registers device_index reg _num count value int device_index Index of DSP device affected by command int reg_num First once register to read unsigned long count Number of registers to read unsigned long value Pointer to area to receive register values dspd_read_once_registers reads count OnCE registers starting from register reg_num from target device device_index and stores the values in the memory pointed to by value The order of the registers is specified in the header file adsregXX h Note Calling order is important dspd_read_once_registers must be called before calling dspd_read_core_registers If the calling order is reversed the values in the OnCE registers will have been altered The function returns DSP_OK on success DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 17 Example 14 17 dspd_read_once_registers Read once registers include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int devn status unsigned long count_once buf_once 15 count_core buf_core ADSCORE
259. otice that the values in the register window the memory window and all other Debugger windows are updated each time you click on Next You can find more information about the next command in Section 3 4 Executing the Next Instruction on page 3 6 To use next from the command line see Section 13 32 NEXT Step Through Subroutine Calls or Macros on page 13 39 11 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Finish Button 11 5 Finish Button The Finish button allows the current function to execute to completion See Figure 11 5 e recae ma amp pasasun jal yu Breal 2 p 5000108 h dev b pr 010E cyc 244 ji x HHHHHHHHHHHH ye HHHHHHHHHHHH 3 aaadaddoddDDDD b A DDDDDDDDODAQ xXI HHHHHH xH HHHHHH r HHHHHH 15H Ie HHHHHH yHe HHHHHH HA utes a2 ad at DDDDDO 34 agaaaa rs DDDDAA ns a bi SHH oo WI SHHHMHH SHAH rA HHHHHH tm ra DDDDOA E Sus Figure 11 5 Finish Button When stepping through a program it is possible that execution will stop in the middle of a function or subroutine Clicking on the Finish button completes the execution of the function or subroutine The Debugger continues until encountering an RTS instruction If another function is encountered during a finish operation execution continues to the end of the current function You can find more information
260. ou can use the Next button on the toolbar to execute the next instruction or line Using next from the toolbar is covered in section 11 4 Next Button on page 11 4 Using next from the command reference line is coverd in section 13 32 NEXT Step Through Subroutine Calls or Macros on page 13 39 Motorola Controlling Execution 3 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Providing an Until Condition 3 5 Providing an Until Condition You can provide an until condition which will cause the Debugger to execute the currently loaded program until a specified location is encountered The location may be specified as a program line number an address or a label 3 5 1 To Provide an Until Condition 1 From the Execute menu choose Until The dialog box in Figure 3 5 appears Device Line Address Label Cancel Figure 3 5 Providing an Until Condition 2 Under Device select the device on which you are debugging Type the line address or label at which to stop execution Line numbers and labels can only be used if the object code includes debugging information To specify an address include the memory space followed by a colon followed by the address For example to execute instructions until address 00c103 is reached type p 00c103 To specify a line number in the currently loaded source file just type in the line number Or to spec
261. p 100 ADSP56000 dsp_startup dsp_new 0 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 dsp_new 1 56002 Allocate structure for device 1 a 56002 dsp_new 2 56002 Allocate structure for device 2 a 56002 dsp_free 1 Free structure for device 1 14 2 40 dsp_free_mem Free Memory Block The routines dsp_alloc dsp_free_mem and dsp_realloc are replacements for the standard C functions malloc free and realloc They are used in much the same way as the standard functions for allocating space for structures buffers etc These functions are used in the debugger libraries they must also be used exclusively in the user debugger code Any attempt to use the standard routines will have unpredictable results include simcom h include protocom h void dsp_free_mem cp char cp pointer to memory block to be freed dsp_free_mem releases a memory block previously allocated with dsp_alloc Its argument cp is the address of the data block See Example 14 40 14 40 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 40 dsp_free_mem Allocate and release memory block include simcom h include protocom h int buffer intis buffer int dsp_alloc sizeof int 10 0 Use the
262. peated tasks such as setting the path loading source programs and setting up watch windows However a macro can consist of almost any Debugger commands 9 1 Creating and Running a Command Macro The command macro is a standard ASCII text file and can be created or edited with any text editor The macro can also be created by recording commands to a log file 9 1 1 To Record a Command Macro 1 2 From the File menu choose Log then select Commands Specify the filename and save The default filename extension is cmd A different extension can be used but is not recommended for the sake of consistency If you specify a filename that already exists you can choose to overwrite the file or append the new commands to the end of the existing file The log file is now recording all Debugger commands whether issued from the menu bar or from the command line in the Command window Use the Debugger commands just as you would during normal program execution Note that there is an exception If you stop program execution while recording commands the stop is not recorded The only way to pause execution from within a macro is to use step next trace until wait or a breakpoint If you have any question about whether a command can be recorded think of it this way if it appears in the command window it is recorded To stop recording from the File menu choose Log then select Close From the dialog box select Commands Cl
263. pecified device s active for program execution e OFF suspends program execution for the specified device The state of the device is not otherwise changed e X deactivates the device and discards all associated structures If the X parameter is used for the current device another device will become the current device At least one device must be activated at all times the last device may not be deactivated e JTAG parameters The ADS supports up to eight command converters on a single development host Each Command Converter supports one JTAG chain that can service up to twenty four devices The DEVICE command associates each device in any position in the JTAG chain with an ADS device number dvn The ADS only performs debugging operations on Motorola DSP devices However to support target systems incorporating other devices the DEVICE command also permits the specification of the JTAG instruction register length so such devices may be handled correctly DVn Specifies the device number to be used to access the device described by the remainder of the parameters 0 31 CCn Specifies the Command Converter to which the device is connected 0 7 TMSn Specifies which TMS Test Mode Select line controls this device 0 1 Command Converter revision 6 only supports TMSO POSn Specifies which position the device occupies in the JTAG chain The device connected directly to TDO from the Command Converter is position 0
264. pressions and in Section 12 1 Displaying the Radix on page 12 1 To set up a watch list from the command line see Section 13 49 WATCH Set Modify View or Clear Watch Item on page 13 52 5 10 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Chapter 6 Input and Output Files The device on which you are debugging your application is of course already in communication with peripherals ports or pins In addition to these inputs and outputs you might find it useful to provide data from an input file and capture output to an output file The Suite56 DSP Debugger provides you with the ability to create input and output files The Debugger provides input data and captures output data by using I O files These I O files transfer data to and from the device You can specify whether the input data is to come from a file or from the keyboard terminal You can specify output data to be written to a file or to the Session window 6 1 How are I O files formatted Input and output is represented in ASCII format which means that I O files can be conveniently edited or printed from a text editor To understand how I O files format data you should be familiar with these concepts e repeat punctuation e comments e memory data 6 1 1 Repeat Punctuation The Debugger provides a way to specify repeated input or output data values and
265. put before it is destroyed The command argument C continue immediately causes control to return to the ADS without prompting the user This may be useful in macro commands allowing system commands to be used without requiring operator intervention Example 13 40 SYSTEM Command system Temporarily exit the ADS interface program and go to the Operating System To re enter the ADS interface program invoke the EXIT command All previous setups will not be altered system dir Invoke the directory Operating System command from within the ADS Interface program system ALL TO del he io exit Create a MS DOS shell and temporarily exit the ADS user interface program Execute two MS DOS commands and re enter the ADS user interface program using the EXIT command The current state as well as opened files of all target DSP addresses will remain the same system c del e temp lod Delete the specified temporary files and continue without issuing the continuation prompt 13 42 TRACE Trace Through DSP Program TRACE dev_list count LI source lines IN instructions The TRACE command gives a snap shot of each instruction during program execution This single stepping capability displays the enabled registers and memory blocks after each instruction until count instruction or C source lines are decremented to zero To execute an instruction requires exiting the Debug mode of operation and entering the User 13 4
266. put data is in ASCII The input whether from the keyboard or from a file can be expressed in decimal rd floating point rf hexadecimal rh or unsigned ru If no radix is specified hexadecimal is assumed as the default Before opening an output file there is some preparation that you must perform outside of the Debugger in order for the data to be correctly written to the output file You will need to place a DEBUG instruction in your program and you will need to set designators in certain registers You need to do this so that the Debugger knows when to perform the data transfer from where to get the data how much data to get and where to put the data To prepare data to be written to an output file 1 Write to the appropriate register a designator that will indicate the Output File Number and the word count length of the data that you want to write You will 13 40 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc OUTPUT Assign Output File assign the Output File Number later when you actually open it The register to which you write this information depends on the target device Device Designate the Output Designate the Output File Number and Family File Number and word the word count i e length of the data as count in register follows DSP56000 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits DSP5610
267. r which is used to save values read from the OnCE port when executing OnCE serial sequences 13 8 CFORCE Assert Reset or Break on Command Converter CFORCE dev_list R reset B break D Debug mode U User mode The CFORCE command is used for forcing a hardware reset or hardware interrupt on a Command Converter The D option can be used to force the Command Converter into the Debug mode in the event that the target has entered the Debug mode by some means other than through the ADS program such as a DEBUG instruction in the user code The U option can be used to force the Command Converter into the User mode in the event that the target has entered the User mode by some means other than through the ADS program such as a push button reset or power on reset When using the U or D arguments internal flags of the user interface program are also set or cleared Caution Placing the Command Converter in Debug mode when the target is NOT in Debug mode can cause unexpected results in the ADS 13 16 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc CLOAD Load OnCE Command Sequence Example 13 4 CFORCE Command Command Explanation cforce dvl r Force a hardware reset on Command Converter 1 cforce b Force an interrupt break on the default Command Converter cforce d Force the default Command Converter into the Debug mode
268. r Radix select the radix format in which you want the variables displayed 6 Click OK The expression that you specified now appears in a Watch window If the expression you type is not valid you will get an error message explaining why the expression is not valid Keep in mind that a C expression that refers to C variables can only be evaluated in the context in which the watch is established That is the variables in the expression are only valid while they are in scope If one of the variables in an expression goes out of scope Motorola Managing Memory and Registers 5 9 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Using a Watch List either because of a function call or return from a function the value is replaced with the message Expression out of scope When all elements of the expression are back in scope the value is again displayed An expression that has gone out of scope because of a function call can be evaluated and displayed by selecting the stack frame for the evaluation context The stack frame assignment remains in effect only until the next instruction is executed An expression that is out of scope because of a function exit cannot be evaluated until the function is again invoked since the expression s variables no longer exist You can find more information about watch lists in Section 8 1 Moving Up and Down the Call Stack on page 8 1 in Chapter 10 Ex
269. r device 0 14 2 58 dsp_step Execute Counted Instructions include simcom h include protocom h dsp_step device_index step int device_index unsigned long step dsp_step causes the target device specified by device_index to execute step instructions The device then returns to Debug mode Note A success return code means the Command Converter has been instructed to make the target device execute the required number of instructions It is necessary to call dsp_check_service_request to find out when the target device has executed the instruction and returned to Debug mode Motorola Library Functions 14 53 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions The function returns TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 58 Example 14 58 dsp_step Execute 1 DSP instruction on device 0 include simcom h include protocom h int devn status unsigned long step_count devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 step_count 11 status dsp_step devn step_ count 14 2 59 dsp_stop Force DSP Device into Debug Mode include simcom h include protocom h dsp_stop device_index int device_index DSP device affected by command dsp_stop forces the device device_index into Debug mode The function returns TRUE on
270. r hardware executes independently of the emulator control software After successfully completing a call to initiate instruction execution e g dsp_go_address dsp_go dsp_step the device executes until a termination condition is encountered 14 66 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Non Display Emulator Termination conditions include e Hardware breakpoint condition satisfied e DEBUG instruction executed e Specified number of instructions executed in dsp_step e Call to dsp_reset etc When the device stops executing the function dsp_check_service_request returns TRUE It is then the responsibility of the user program to determine the reason for the service request Hardware breakpoints are described in the appropriate hardware documentation and are not covered here Software breakpoints are caused by executing conditional or unconditional DEBUG instructions These instructions must be inserted into the user DSP code This may be achieved in several possible ways not all of which are suitable for production code e Hard coded DEBUG instructions included in the DSP code e NOP instructions in code which may be overwritten with DEBUG instructions e Save instruction word and overwrite with an unconditional DEBUG instruction MUST be the first word of multi word instructions It is the responsibility of t
271. r is set to decimal this means that values you enter are presumed to be decimal and you don t need to type a preceding apostrophe If the default radix for the Debugger is set to hexadecimal this means that values can be entered in hexadecimal without typing a preceding dollar Similarly if the default radix is unsigned or binary their respective specifiers do not need to be typed before the value Be careful to distinguish the input radix from the output radix The default radix refers to the input radix The output radix refers to the display radix and can be different from the input radix The output radix is the radix that describes the way values are displayed in the Memory window Register window Watch window etc You can change the radix for a particular register or for a particular memory location by changing the radix For more information see Section 7 3 Changing the Radix on page 7 5 Motorola Displayed Information 12 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Display the Current Breakpoint 12 2 Display the Current Breakpoint It is often useful to display the enabled and disabled breakpoints for the current device by opening the Breakpoints window To display the current breakpoints 1 From the Windows menu choose Breakpoints A dialog box shows a list of the breakpoints set for the current device The dialog box in Figure 12 1 shows an example o
272. reak on Program access fetch or P move r w pce break on executed fetch only read only pa break on Program access r w xa break on X data memory access r w ya break on Y data memory access r w Table 3 6 DSP56100 Device Family Hardware Breakpoint Types Breakpoint Type Meaning pert break on any Program core fetch read only pem break on Program read fetch or move read only xabl break on X address bus 1 access xab2 break on X address bus 2 access Table 3 7 DSP56300 Device Family Hardware Breakpoint Types Breakpoint Type Meaning dma break on DMA access r w or r w pa break on Program access r w or r w xa break on X data memory access r w or r w ya break on Y data memory access r w or r w Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc Types of Hardware Breakpoints Table 3 8 DSP56600 Family Hardware Breakpoint Types Breakpoint Type Meaning pa break on Program access r w or r w xa break on X data memory access r w or r w ya break on Y data memory access r w or r w Table 3 9 DSP56800 Family Hardware Breakpoint Types Breakpoint Type Meaning pcf break on any Program core fetch read only pem break on Program read fetch or move read only xabl break on X address bus 1
273. resenting NOP include proto56n h unsigned long ops 3 Instruction words to be disassembled char return_string 120 The return mnemonic goes here int numwords Number of operands used by disassembler ops 0 0L ops 1 0L ops 2 0L numwords dspt_unasm_56k ops return_string OL OL NULL Now numwords 1 return_string nop 14 2 25 dsp_alloc Allocate Memory The routines dsp_alloc dsp_free_mem and dsp_realloc are replacements for the standard C functions malloc free and realloc They are used in much the same way as the standard functions for allocating space for structures buffers etc These functions are used in the debugger libraries they must also be used exclusively in the user debugger code Any attempt to use the standard routines will have unpredictable results 14 28 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions include simcom h include protocom h void dsp_alloc nbytes clearmem unsigned int nbytes Number of bytes to allocate int clearmem Clear allocated memory dsp_alloc allocates the number of bytes of memory specified in nbytes The memory block allocated is aligned for use as any data type If clearmem is true nonzero the allocated memory is cleared to zero The address of the allocated buffer is returned as
274. riate dt_memory structure from dt_var mem for the selected device These structures are described in the simdev h file which is included with the emulator The memory_map parameter can be obtained with the function dsp_findmenm by using the memory name as a key Use the emulator help mem command for a list of valid memory names Valid memory_map values are 14 56 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions memory_map_ concatenated with a valid memory name As an example memory_map_pa refers to off chip pa memory on the 96002 device See Example 14 62 Example 14 62 dsp wmem_bl1k Copy 100 values in X c400 to P a000 include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h int devn unsigned long address count memval 100 memval 0L devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 address 0xc400 dsp_rmem devn memory_map_x address 100L amp memval 0 fetch 100 values address 0xa000 from X c400 dsp_wmem devn memory_map_p address 100L amp memval 0 and write to P a000 14 2 63 dsp_wreg Write a DSP Device Register include simcom h include protocom h dsp_wreg device_index periph_num reg_num reg_val int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command int periph_num
275. ring a JSR instruction a jump to a subroutine the Debugger begins with the first instruction of the subroutine and steps through it one instruction at a time To step one instruction at a time from the toolbar 1 Make sure that program execution is halted and that the Source window is not open 2 Click the Step button on the toolbar The Debugger will execute the next assembly instruction To step one line at a time from the toolbar 1 Make sure that program execution is halted and that the Source window is open If the Source window is not open the Debugger will automatically execute the next instruction in the Assembly window rather than then next line in the Source window 2 Click the Step button on the toolbar The Debugger will execute the next executable line of code in the Source window Comments lines in the source code are ignored Notice that the values in the Register window the Memory window and all other Debugger windows are updated each time you click step You can find more information about about the step command in Section 3 2 Step Through Instructions on page 3 3 and in Section 3 4 Executing the Next Instruction on page 3 6 To use step from the command line see Section 13 39 STEP Step Through DSP Program on page 13 46 Motorola Debugger Toolbar 11 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Next Button 11 4 Next Button
276. rom where to get the data how much data to get and where to put the data 6 4 1 To Prepare Data to be Written to an Output File 1 Write to the appropriate register a designator that will indicate the output file number and the word count length of the data that you want to write You will assign the output file number later when you actually open it The register to which you write this information depends on the target device Table 6 9 Output File Designators for Specific Suite56 DSP Devices Device Designate the Output Fils Designate the Output File Number and the Word E Number and Word Count in Family a i Count l e Length of the Data as Follows Register DSP56000 XO File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits DSP56100 XO File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP56300 X0 File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 16 bits DSP56600 XO File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP56800 XO File Number in the upper 8 bits count in the lower 8 bits DSP96000 RO File Number in the upper 16 bits count in the lower 16 bits 2 Write to the appropriate registers a designator that indicates the memory space and address from where you want the data to be read Designate the memory space as follows 0 p 1 x 2 y 3 1 Motorola Input and Output Files 6 11 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Se
277. rter routines both versions e sim display only user interface routines The driver level routines both those referred to above and those documented in the rest of this chapter are not intended to be called by emulator code They are designed to be called directly or indirectly by the interface routines They are documented so that the user can rewrite them to drive alternate emulator hardware Other lower level functions mentioned in this chapter are not intended to be called by user code these functions are not documented and are specified by the prefixes dspl_ siml_ and dspt1_ 14 1 2 Library Entrypoints Listed By Prefix The following sections list the different routines 14 1 2 1 ADS Specific Utility Routines Table 14 1 lists ADS specific utility routines Table 14 1 ads_ ADS Specific Utility Routines Routine Description ads_cache_registers devn Read OnCE and core registers from device ads_startup devp devtype Initialize ADS database and driver 14 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc ADS Object Library Files 14 1 2 2 Command Converter Driver Level Routines Table 14 2 lists command converter driver level routines Table 14 2 dspd_cc_ Command Converter Driver Level Routines Routine Description dspd_cc_architecture devn device type Initialize Command C
278. ruction pipeline instruction counter and cycle counter will be cleared before program simulation begins The device registers are reset and execution begins at the reset exception address If you chose to go from an address under Address type in the address from which you want to begin executing instructions If you leave the address blank execution will begin from the current program counter value If you specify an address the instruction pipeline instruction counter and cycle counter will be cleared before program simulation Execution will begin from the address you specify Select the Go to Breakpoint checkbox if you want to stop execution at a particular breakpoint If selected all other stop breakpoints will be ignored Under Break Number select the breakpoint where you want to stop execution To see where you have breakpoints set Display the Current Breakpoints in the breakpoint window Under Count specify how many times the Debugger should encounter the breakpoint before stopping For example if you set the count to 3 the program execution will be stopped on the third time that the breakpoint is encountered The last instruction executed will be the breakpoint When all conditions are set click OK Execution will begin Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Step Through Instructions Notice that dur
279. s e Section 14 2 Library Function Descriptions defines each function e Section 14 3 Emulator Screen Management Functions defines the display terminal I O functions e Section 14 4 Non Display Emulator discusses display and non display support e Section 14 5 Multiple Device Emulation describes the emulation of multiple DSP devices e Section 14 6 Reserved Function Names lists reserved function names e Section 14 7 Emulator Global Variables describes global data used by the emulator e Section 14 8 Modification of Emulator Global Structures covers tailoring items in the global structures Motorola Library Functions 14 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc ADS Object Library Files 14 1 ADS Object Library Files The following sections describe the different types of object library files 14 1 1 Ads Object Library Entrypoints The library functions are listed below They are divided into groups by their function name prefix The prefix indicates to which part of the ADS they belong and indicates if they are available in the display or non display versions of the emulator e ads_ ADS specific routines both versions e dspd_ driver level not for use by user code both versions e spd_cc_ Command Converter driver level not for use by user code both e dspt_ DSP device dependent routines both versions e dsp_ both versions e dsp_cc_ Command Conve
280. s DSP_OK if the operation succeeds DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 3 Motorola Library Functions 14 9 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 3 dspd_break Force DSP into debug mode include cc h include simcom h include driver h int devn int break_status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 break_status dspd_break devn DSP_ONCE_BREAK Force device into DEBUG mode 14 2 4 dspd_cc_architecture lnitialize Command Converter for DSP Family include driver h int dspd_cc_architecture device_index device_type int device_index DSP device affected by command int device_type Type of DSP device This function initializes the Command Converter device_index for the target architecture specified by device_type The device attached to the Command Converter may be any member of the specified DSP family See Example 14 4 Valid values for device_type are e DSP_CC_56000 e DSP_CC_56300 e DSP_CC_96000 Example 14 4 dspd_cc_architecture Initialize Command Converter for device 0 a 56002 include driver h int devn status devn 0 status dspd_cc_architecture devn DSP_CC_56000 setup CC for 56K family dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002
281. s Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting Up the Display Environment The display environment refers to the way the windows of the Debugger are arranged on your monitor There is no right or wrong way to set up the display environment However there are some windows that you will commonly want to have opened besides the Session and Command windows These include e the Assembly window e the Source window if a COFF file with debugging information is loaded You will also want to have windows for e displaying register values e displaying memory values and perhaps e awatch list If you are debugging a program written in C you will also want to have the Stack window open so that you can see the call stack Depending on the size and resolution of your monitor having all of these windows open at once means that there will be some overlapping Your own experience with the Debugger will lead you to the best configuration of these windows However in a typical session the Debugger might look like Figure 2 4 2 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting Up the Display Environment File Display Modify Execute Windows Help P24 2S oe Device Scroll To Address 000100 p3 0253 wcommand 000101 p3 0254 wsource 000102 p3 0255 wsess
282. s offset to be added to the starting location of memory specified in the data record 13 30 LOG Log Commands or Session Output LOG dev_ list OFF C commands S session filename o a c Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 37 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc MORE Enable Disable Session Paging LOG dev_list OFF V source display status line The LOG command allows the user to record command entries only or record all session display output to a file Recording of commands only is useful as a method of generating macro command files Recording all session display output provides a convenient way for the user to review the results of an extended sequence of commands The user would otherwise only have access to the last 100 lines of output on the terminal Since the output log files are in ASCII format they may easily be printed or reviewed using an editor program Entering the LOG command with no parameters will cause a display of the currently opened log filenames The keyword OFF is used to terminate logging The C and S key characters are used to specify whether the logfile will contain only commands C or all session output S The suffixes cmd and log are added respectively to the commands only or session filename if no other suffix is specified The default file path for each target DSP can be changed with the PATH command If a f
283. s the possible choices Table 3 4 Hardware Breakpoint Actions Breakpoint Resulting Action Halt Stops program execution when the breakpoint is encountered Note Displays the breakpoint expression in the Session window each time it is true Program execution continues The display in the Session window is not updated until program execution stops Show Displays the enabled register memory set Program execution continues Command Executes a Debugger command at the breakpoint Device execution commands such as TRACE or GO will not execute Increment n Increments the n counter by one 11 If the action specified is to execute a command under Command type the Debugger command 12 Click OK 3 18 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Hardware Breakpoints 3 8 2 To Clear a Hardware Breakpoint 1 From the Execute menu choose Breakpoints then select Clear The Clear Breakpoints dialog box shown in Figure 2 7 on page 2 14 displays a list of all the current breakpoints 2 Select the breakpoint you want removed so that it is highlighted If you are clearing consecutive breakpoints you can click and drag to highlight more than one breakpoint Or hold down the CTRL key while clicking on breakpoints to select more than one 3 Click OK The breakpoints you selected are now deleted Breakpoints
284. s with Ifile 1st wlist win2 off Close list window number 2 wlistoff Close all open list windows wlist win3 Open a list window with a window number of 3 with no text file displayed Motorola Debugger Command Reference 18 55 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WMEMORY GUI Memory Window 13 57 WMEMORY GUI Memory Window WMEMORY dev_list win_num space addr OFF WMEMORY is a GUI command that opens a memory window Multiple device windows may be opened for viewing and changing separate memory areas and spaces at the same time and for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs The memory window is positioned initially to view the address specified by the addr field The addr field may also be used in conjunction with the space field to select the exact memory space required Example 13 56 WMEMORY Command Command Explanation wmemory pi Open a memory window for the internal program pi memory space for the current device wmemory xi 0 Open a memory window for the xi memory space containing address 0 for the current device wmemory dv2 win3 x Open a memory window for memory space x with a window number of 3 for the 4100 current device Scroll window to display address 4100 wmemory off Close all memory windows for the current device wmemory win3 off Close memory window 3 for the current device
285. scale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints The optional parameter bn represents a breakpoint number Breakpoint numbers do not have to be consecutive they can be assigned arbitrarily For example it may be convenient to allocate breakpoints so that one function is assigned breakpoints 1 to 10 another uses 11 to 20 and so on If no breakpoint number is assigned the default will be the next available consecutive number The parameter swbp_type represents the software breakpoint type and is required If you type al the breakpoint will always be acted upon Breakpoint types other than al are conditional and device specific See the list of Types of Software Breakpoints for an explanation of each type of breakpoint The parameter address represents the address where the software breakpoint is set This parameter is required For example to set a breakpoint at address 103 in p memory type pis103 IMPORTANT This address MUST be the first word of an instruction Note ALSO If you have provided a swbp_type breakpoint type the breakpoint can ONLY be set to an address which contains a nop Setting the breakpoint to an address which contains any other opcode will cause your program to execute incorrectly The optional parameter t expression represents a test of the expression within the parentheses If the expression is true the breakpoint will cause the action to be performed If the expression
286. scale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc SAVE Save Memory To File Example 13 36 REDIRECT Command Command Explanation redirect Display the redirect list which shows each of the three streams that can be redirected along with to where they are being redirected redirect DVO 3 4 5 off Cancel all stream redirection for specified target devices redirect stdin input Redirect the C stdin standard input stream from the file input cio cio is the default extension redirect stdout output txt Redirect the C stdout standard output stream to the file output txt redirect stderr errors Redirect the C stderr standard error stream to the file errors cio redirect stdout output o Redirect the C stdout stream to the file output cio overwriting the file if it already exists redirect stdout output a Redirect the C stdout stream to the file output cio appending to the end of the file if it already exists redirect stdout output c Redirect the C stdout stream to the file output cio but don t redirect if the file already exists 13 38 SAVE Save Memory To File SAVE dev_num S state address_block filename 0 a c The SAVE command allows creation of an ADS state file from the current ADS state or creation of an OMF file from specified memory blocks If S is specified as the second parameter an ADS state file is created It contains the
287. sfer the data from the input file The write destination for this data is designated by setting the appropriate registers as described above 5 Under Radix select the number system hexadecimal decimal etc that the input data is in 6 Ifthe input data is coming from a file under File Name type in the name of the input file or click on the File button to browse for the file The default filename extension is 10 6 6 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Input File 7 Click OK If you are entering the data from the terminal keyboard the Interactive Input dialog box will appear when the debug statement is encountered The Interactive Input dialog box will prompt you for the data values Type in the first data value and click OK After entering a value and clicking OK the Interactive Input dialog box appears again ready for the second data value Continue to enter values and click OK until you have entered all values When all values have been entered click on Cancel in the Interactive Input dialog box A file is created in the working directory that contains the data you entered from the keyboard The filename will be similar to term0000 io You can reuse this file as you would any other input file To assign an input file from the command line see Section 13 27 INPUT Assign Input File on
288. sim_const curline and sim_const curclm variables 14 3 4 simw_endwin End Emulator Window simw_endwin This function is normally called when returning to the operating system level from the emulator It must terminate any special processing associated with terminal I O for the emulator and clear the display 14 3 5 simw_getch Non Translated Keyboard Input simw_getch This function gets a single character in a non translated mode from the terminal It is not used much by the emulator only when returning from the execution of the system command prior to the time when the emulator s special terminal I O processing is reinitialized 14 3 6 simw_gkey Translated Keyboard Input simw_gkey This function gets a keystroke from the terminal and maps it to one of the accepted internal codes used by the emulator The internal codes are defined in simusr h This function should not output the character to the terminal This function is a good candidate for modification if you want to change the set of input control characters used by the emulator 14 3 7 simw_putc Output Character to Terminal simw_putc c char c This function outputs the character in the variable c at the current cursor and column position It advances and updates the sim_const curclm variable This function is not used often by the emulator and it is not very time critical when it is used so the emulator implementation is just to call simw_puts after crea
289. simcom h include protocom h int status char bufptr Allocate temporary buffer of 50 characters Buffer is cleared bufptr char dsp_alloc 50 sizeof char 1 if bufptr NULL handle error increase buffer size to 82 characters preserving contents bufptr char dsp_realloc bufptr 82 sizeof char 14 2 50 dsp_reset Reset Specified DSP Device include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_reset device_index int device_index Index of affected DSP device dsp_reset resets the target device device_index into Debug mode To reset a device into User mode see dsp_go_reset The function returns TRUE on success FALSE otherwise See Example 14 50 Example 14 50 dsp_reset Place DSP device 3 into debug mode include simcom h include protocom h int devn status devn 3 dsp_new devn 56002 Create new DSP structure ensure device in known state status dsp_reset devn Reset device into DEBUG mode Motorola Library Functions 14 47 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 51 dsp_rmem Read DSP Memory Location include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h int dsp_rmem device_index memory_map address return_value int device_index DSP device to be affected by com
290. sion x m Radix 5 Expression C Binary E Decimal Fractional G Figating Pat Hexadecimal C Unsigned f All Cancel Apply Figure 10 1 Evaluating an Expression 2 Under Expression type the expression that you want to evaluate if the expression is a C expression enclose it in curly braces c_expression Note that some hexadecimal constants such as a0 or d1 may also be valid register names for the target device It is usually best to precede hexadecimal constants with a dollar sign to distinguish them from registers that might have the same name If there is no dollar sign preceding an hexadecimal number and it is in fact also the name of a register the Debugger assumes that you are referring to the register 3 Under Radix select the radix in which to display the result of the expression If All is selected a C expression will display the type of the expression and the value in the format that is normal for the expression type Selecting All when evaluating a DSP assembler expression will display select radices depending on the expression itself 4 Click OK The Session window displays the result of your evaluation C expressions are evaluated in the context of the current stack frame by default that is the value displayed is that which would have been returned if the expression had been included in the program at the current execution point C expressions can be evaluated in the context of any of the
291. sp_go execution starts immediately for the specified device and continues independently of the ADS Each device must be started by a separate command or function call Execution continues until an event in the device causes the device to enter Debug Mode such as reaching a breakpoint or the required number of instructions being executed or the ADS stops execution for a target with a force b command or a call to function dsp_stop All other devices will continue executing while that device is being serviced The emulator needs to check each device to see if it has entered Debug Mode by calling dsp_check_service_request for each executing device in turn This may be coded as a tight loop for maximum response or interleaved with other activity as required 14 5 3 Multiple DSP Emulator Display The emulator display functions are contained in the source file scrmgr c in the emulator package This code supports the scrolling virtual screen for the ADS The supplied display code uses a single window The lines above the command line form a scrolling region in which session output is displayed The command line error line and help line are the three bottom lines of the display The default size of the scroll buffer holds 100 lines of output As each device causes output to the screen a message is output specifying which device caused the output The device command allows the user to switch the displayed device When it switches to a new device
292. sp_startup startup include simcom h include protocom h ads_startup 100 ADSP56000 dsp_startup Initialize DSP structures dsp_new 0 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 dsp_new 1 56002 Allocate structure for device 1 14 52 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com a 56002 a 56002 Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 57 dsp_status Determine DSP Device Status include simcom h include protocom h int dsp_status device_index mode int device_index DSP device affected by command int mode address of buffer to receive device status dsp_status places the execution status of the target device device_index in the int pointed to by mode Valid values for mode are e DSP_USER_MODE device is executing a user program e DSP_DEBUG_MODE device is in debug mode The function returns TRUE on success or FALSE otherwise See Example 14 57 Example 14 57 dsp_ status determine status of DSP 0 include simcom h include protocom h int devn status int device _mode receive mode of device 0 devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dsp_status devn amp device_mode get current mode fo
293. specified by address The function returns TRUE on success FALSE otherwise See Example 14 42 Example 14 42 dsp_go_address Start execution from specified address include simcom h include protocom h int devn status char load_fname filter2 cld devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dsp_ldmem devn load_fname load program into memory status dsp_go_address devn 0x14001 start program execution 14 2 43 dsp_go_reset lInitiate Program Execution after Device Reset include simcom h include protocom h dsp_go_reset device_index int device_index DSP device affected by command dsp_go_reset causes the target device specified by device_index to be reset into User Mode Execution starts at the reset value for pc To place a device into debug mode see dsp_reset The function returns TRUE on success FALSE otherwise See Example 14 43 14 42 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 43 dsp_go_reset Initiate program execution by reset include simcom h include protocom h int devn status char load_fname filter2 cld devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dsp_ldmem dev
294. st of the watch items that you have specified The watch list gets updated every time program execution is halted including breakpoints The value or expression that you watch can be valid even if it is not calculated during program execution C expressions can be used enclosed in braces c_expression Symbolic references can be used if symbols have been loaded from the object module The values are re calculated at each break in execution To display a value in a watch list 1 From the Windows menu choose Watch The dialog box in Figure 10 2 appears Add Watch Expression To Window x Window Radix ial C Decimal zi C Fractional C Figating Ramt C Hexadecimal C Unsigned Expression Default 1 Cancel Apply Figure 10 2 Displaying a Value in a Watch List 2 Select the window number where you want the expression to appear You will want to do this when you have more than one Watch window open 3 Under Expression type in the expression that you want to add to the Watch window 4 Under Radix select the radix format in which you want the variables displayed 5 Click OK The expression that you specified now appears in a Watch window If the expression you type is not valid you will get an error message explaining why the expression is not valid 10 10 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc
295. successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 59 Example 14 59 dsp_stop force DSP device to debug mode include simcom h include protocom h int devn status devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dsp_ldmem devn x14 lod load program file status dsp_go devn start the device running user program of sree Pgs status dsp_stop devn stop the device now status ads_cache_registers devn cache regs on entry to debug mode 14 54 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 60 dsp_unlock Unlock Password Protected Device Type include simcom h include protocom h dsp_unlock device_type password char password Pointer to string containing password char device_type Name corresponding to DSP device type dsp_unlock provides the password for protected device_types It must be used prior to the dsp_new function call if the device_type is password protected See Example 14 60 Example 14 60 dsp_unlock Create a devic mulation of the password protected 56001 device include simcom h include protocom h int devn ads_startup 100 ADSP56000 dsp_startup devn 0 dsp_unlock 5
296. t devices is written to the Session window A message is output to indicate which target device produced the following output Example 13 59 WSESSION Command wsession Open a Session window for the current device wsession off Close the Session window 13 61 WSOURCE GUI Source Window WSOURCE dev_list OFF The WSOURCE command opens a Source Code window Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 60 WSOURCE Command wsource Open a Source window for the current device wsource off Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 57 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WSTACK GUI Stack Window Close the Source windows for the current device 13 62 WSTACK GUI Stack Window WSTACK dev_list OFF The WSTACK command opens a Device Stack window Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 61 WSTACK Command wstack Open a Stack window for the current device wstack off Close the Stack window for the current device 13 63 WWATCH GUI Watch Window WWATCH dev_list win_num wn radix reg addr expression WWATCH dev_list win _num wn OFF The WWATCH command opens a Watch window Multiple device windows can be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 62 WWATCH Command
297. t from file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE 100 R0 begin writing data at address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 3 2 DSP56100 Family First the input file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 16 bit register Indicate these by writing the file number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 8 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 O P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 4 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56100 Family Operation Comment MOVE S030c XO input from file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE 100 R0 begin writing data at address 100 MOVE 1 R1 in X memory space DEBUG enter Debug mode 6 8 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Examples of How to Assign an Input File 6 3 3 DSP56300 Family The input file number and the data length must be indicated in the XO register 24 bit register Indicate these by writing the File Number in the upper 8 bits and the count in the lower 16 bits Then indicate the beginning address in register RO Then indicate the memory space in register R1 O P 1 X 2 Y 3 L Table 6 5 Input File Assembly Code for DSP56300 Family Operation Comment MOVE S03000c X0 input from file 3 a block of 12 words MOVE
298. ta transfer to take place For more information see section 6 3 Examples of How to Assign an Input File Once the debug instruction is written and the registers set you can assign the input file Motorola Input and Output Files 6 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Assigning an Input File 6 2 2 To Assign the Input File 1 From the File menu choose Input then select Open The dialog box in Figure 6 1 appears Open Input File x Input Number Debug Address Radix 1 iC Decimal zi C Fractional F O Ficating Point ees Hexadecimal e Fie Unsigned C Terminal ENTE File Name File 4 gt Cancel Apply Figure 6 1 Providing Input Data 2 Under Input Number select the number you want to assign to this input file The default number that is shown is the next available number Input numbers do not have to be consecutive they can be assigned arbitrarily which means that you can assign input numbers in any way that helps you organize the sources of the inputs 3 Under From select the source of the input data Select File if the input data will come from an existing file Select Terminal if the input data will be entered directly from the keyboard 4 Under Debug Address type the address where the debug statement of your program resides When executed this debug statement will indicate to the Debugger that it should tran
299. target DSP address display dv2 p 30 50 Display p memory address block 30 to 50 of target DSP address 2 display w Display all target DSP addresses that are currently executing user programs display v Display the user interface program and Command Converter monitor program revision numbers display on host Display enable the host peripheral registers display on all Display enable all programming model and peripheral registers display X 0 100 Display the values of x memory locations 0 to 100 hex 13 19 DOWN Move Down the C Function Call Stack DOWN dev list n The DOWN command is used to move down the call stack It can be used in conjunction with the WHERE FRAME and UP commands to display and traverse the C function call stack After entering a new call stack frame using DOWN that call stack frame becomes the current scope for evaluation In other words for C expressions the EVALUATE command acts as though this new frame is the proper place to start looking for variables down down 2 13 26 Example 13 17 DOWN Command Move down the call stack by one stack frame Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc EVALUATE Evaluate an Expression Move down the call stack by two stack frames 13 20 EVALUATE Evaluate an Expression EVALUATE dev_list B binary D decimal F float fract H hex
300. terface cable which may be as simple as a 2 row x 7 set of test points The software program provides the routines necessary for the user to communicate with the target DSP on the ADM or the target application The software program s powerful commands enable you to perform a variety of tasks You can make operating system command calls from within the program or you can make temporary exits to the operating system without disturbing current setups to the target DSP Note that the individual ADM user s manuals specify which version of the software to load e g DSP56301ADM uses the ADS56300 or GDS56300 software The macro command filename default cmd extension is an optional parameter The macro command file should contain a sequence of commands to execute upon ADS start up and prior to command entry from the keyboard You can nest macro commands to any level a macro command file may call another macro command file You generate the macro commands from within the ADS program using the log command Refer to Section 13 30 LOG Log Commands or Session Output on page 13 37 for further details If you are working on a host computer which invokes the ADS using a mouse it may not be easy to invoke the user interface program with a macro command file To solve this problem the ADS searches for a specific file named startup cmd in the same directory from which the ADS is invoked If the ADS finds startup cmd it is opened as a macro co
301. ters and memory blocks trace 20 Execute 20 instructions and display the enabled registers and memory blocks after each instruction trace 5 li Execute the next 5 lines of source and display enabled registers and memory blocks after each line trace dv2 4 5 Execute 5 instructions on target DSP address 2 and target DSP address 4 from their current program counter and display their enabled registers and memory blocks after each instruction 13 43 TYPE Display the Result Type of a C Expression TYPE dev_list c_expression The TYPE command is used to display the result type of a C expression If result of the expression is a storage location e g just a variable name or an element of an array it will display the address of the storage location in addition to its data type Example 13 42 TYPE Command type count Display the type and location of the variable count Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 49 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc UNLOCK Unlock Password Protected Device Type type 0 5 i Display the type of the given expression 13 44 UNLOCK Unlock Password Protected Device Type UNLOCK dev_type password The UNLOCK command provides password enabling for emulation of unannounced device types Once unlocked the device type may be selected with the DEVICE command Example 13 43 UNLOCK Command unlock 56002 x51 234 Enable d
302. th the specified instruction asm x 0 add lt 2 a Store assembled instruction in specified data memory location This feature may be useful for patching overlaid programs where overlays are copied from data to program memory before execution asm dv3 b Perform byte wide assembly from address 40100 in y memory Each y 040100 byte of the instruction is stored in successive locations so two or three locations are required to store each 16 or 24 bit instruction Even if assembled into program memory this code cannot be executed directly it is intended for use with code similar to the byte wide loader in the ROM bootstrap code Byte wide assembly may be used interactively as in this example or to assemble a single instruction For more information see Section 13 5 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints Section CCHANGE Change Command Converter Memory Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 9 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints 13 5 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints Syntax to clear enable or disable breakpoints BREAK dev_list bn bn 0O OFF E enable D disable Syntax for Software Breakpoints BREAK dev_list tbn swbp_type address t expression count action Syntax for Hardware Breakpoints on the DSP56300 and DSP56600 Device Families BREAK dev_list tbn
303. that gana Sh tas ah Reece org Saw adnan tetas 13 42 ads_ ADS Specific Utility ROutines oo ooooooooooo o o 14 2 dspd_cc_ Command Converter Driver Level Routines 14 3 dspd_ Driver Level Routines 4 1455405 4 eieus la 14 3 dspt_ DSP Device Specific Routines o o ooo ooooooo o 14 4 dsp_cc_ Command Converter Interface Routines 14 4 dsp_ ADS Interface ROUtIMeS o oooooooooooooo ooo 14 5 sim_ User Interface ROULINES 2 iio seo Sak we ees os Seek we 14 7 Emulator Screen Management Functions 4 14 61 x Suites6 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 4 1 4 2 4 3 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 Motorola Freescale Semiconductor Inc List of Figures DSP Debugger Command Window 0 000 c cece e eee 1 7 Setting the Working Directory Path 0 cece eee 2 3 Loading a COFF eld File 5 rons OA es Wate yee ahead ees 2 5 setting Up the Display Environment 2 0000 sacs desea weeds Ye 2 7 A Typical Session Window Using the Suite56 Debugger 2 9 Add Hem toa Watch List uta Ara bee ale ios 2 10 Setting a Software Breakpoint o1i mss nes awa la ua Saw se 2 12 Clear Breakpoints Dialog Box ui a See wie Coens 2 14 Setting a Hardware Breakpoint vv a 2 1
304. the return value type void If the requested memory cannot be allocated the error message Insufficient memory dsp_alloc is output and the return value is the NULL pointer See Example 14 25 Example 14 25 dsp_alloc Allocate temporary buffer of 50 int Buffer is cleared include simcom h include protocom h int tbptr tbptr int dsp_alloc 50 sizeof int 1 if tbptr NULL handle error 14 2 26 dsp_cc_fmem Fill Command Converter Memory with a Value include simcom h include protocom h include cc h include coreaddr h int dsp_cc_fmem device mtype address count value int device Command Converter affected by command enum memory_map mtype Memory space to fill unsigned long address Address of start of memory block unsigned long count Length of memory block unsigned long value Fill value dsp_cc_fmem initializes a block of memory in the Command Converter device starting at address address length count in address space mt ype with the value pointed to by value Valid values for mt ype are DSP_CC_YMEM DSP_CC_XMEM e DSP_CC_PMEM Motorola Library Functions 14 29 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions The return value is TRUE for success FALSE otherwise If the return value is FALSE then some but not all
305. the text in the buffer at that position This function only displays the text that is in the scrolling portion of the display 14 3 11 simw_refresh Screen Update after Buffering Output simw_refresh The emulator buffers screen output in implementations other than MSDOS in order to decrease the time spent repainting the screen This provides a fixed display effect for consecutive trace commands The simw_refresh function will take care of refreshing the screen following buffering of screen output It also resets the sim_const scrnest variable to 0 to coincide with the non buffered status of the screen following the refresh 14 3 12 simw_scrnest Increase Screen Buffering One Level simw_scrnest This function increments a counter to signify the screen output buffering level The companion simw_unnest and simw_refresh functions provide the output Motorola Library Functions 14 63 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Non Display Emulator buffering operations for the emulator The sim_const scrnest variable is incremented each time this function is called 14 3 13 simw_unnest Decrease Screen Buffering One Level simw_unnest This function decrements the sim_const scrnest variable each time it is called If the screen buffering level drops below one simw_unnest will call simw_refresh to update the screen 14 3 14 simw winit lnitialize Window Parameters
306. theses may be nested A closing parenthesis without a following repeat count will cause the data sequence within the parentheses to repeat forever Example 13 26 Examples of Input File Data SABCF A single data item ABDF LFF 20 13 34 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc LIST List Source File Lines Repeat the data item 1FF twenty times CC 50 5 Repeat the sequence of data pairs CC 50 five times There are two levels of terminal data input capability provided by the ADS Debugger If the INPUT command specifies term as the input filename the ADS program enters a resident editor which allows creation of an input data file The data file is given a temporary name termxxxx io xxxx 0000 9999 and is saved on the disk at the termination of the INPUT command The entire contents of the input file may be specified in this manner including any of the valid fields specified above A second level of terminal data input allows the user to be prompted any time the next input data value is needed This method is triggered if the lower case letter t is encountered in the data field of the input file Each time a t is encountered the user will be prompted for a single data value from the terminal The ADS Debugger will read the input data using the radix option specified in the INPUT command Hexadecimal is the default input radix Examp
307. ting a temporary string from the character c 14 62 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Emulator Screen Management Functions 14 3 8 simw_puts Output String to Terminal simw_puts line column text flag int line Move cursor to this line for output int column Move cursor to this column for output char text Text string to be output int flag O non bold 1 bold on off by 1 2 all bold This function outputs the string in text to the terminal at the specified 1ine and column Highlighting of output can be enabled either by setting the flag parameter to 2 or by enclosing text in curly braces and setting the flag parameter to 1 14 3 9 simw_redo Repaint Screen with Output from Device simw_redo device int device Use screen buffer from this device to repaint screen 7 This function repaints the screen from a device screen buffer It is normally only called when reentering the emulator following a system command after loading the device state with the load s filename command or after switching devices in a multiple device emulation with the device command 14 3 10 simw_redraw Redraw Screen after Scroll Count simw_redraw count int count Number of lines to scroll before repainting the screen ey This function scrolls up or down count lines in the display buffer then redisplays
308. tion On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Assembly Window 12 5 Assembly Window The Assembly window allows you to display and edit the contents of memory set and clear breakpoints and follow program execution As the program executes the display is updated at each break in execution The next instruction to be executed is always displayed highlighted in red To use the Assembly window 1 From the Windows menu choose Assembly The Assembly window appears as in Figure 12 5 red highlight indicates that this Dv00 Assembly is the next instruction to be Scroll To Address executed Mnemonic 000100 p3 0253 move 80 r0 000101 p3 0254 move H 80 r4 000102 p3 0255 move H c0 r2 blue indicates 000103 p3 0256 move 8 m0 an enabled 000104 p3 0257 move 8 m4 breakpoint 000105 p3 0258 move H 8 m2 000106 p3 0259 move H 3 n2 000107 p3 0260 move H 3 n4 000108 p3 0261 do lt 3 113 pink indicates 00010a p3 0263 do lt 3 112 a disabled 00010c p3 0265 clr a x r0 x0 y r4 J n4 y0 breakpoint 00010d p3 0266 rep H lt 2 00010e p3 0267 mac y0 x0 a x 10 x0 y r4 r14 yl sl Figure 12 5 Assembly Window 2 To scroll to a specific address type the address in the box labeled Scroll To Address and press ENTER 3 To edit an instruction single click the mnemonic Notice that the mnemonic text is now highlighted Type the new assembly instruction and press ENTER Notice that the next instruc
309. tion is highlighted In order to avoid accidentally typing over that instruction click on an area outside of the mnemonic 4 Breakpoints can be set disabled or cleared by double clicking an address or label field Double click the address or label to set the breakpoint Double click again on the address or label to disable the breakpoint Double click again on the address or label to remove the breakpoint Enabled breakpoints appear in blue Disabled breakpoints appear in pink Motorola Displayed Information 12 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Source Window The assembly window and its usage are discussed in Section 2 4 Setting Up the Display Environment on page 2 7 Section 7 2 Setting the Default Device on page 7 4 and in Section 12 2 Display the Current Breakpoint on page 12 2 To use the assembly window from the command line see Section 13 4 ASM Single Line Interactive Assembler on page 13 8 12 6 Source Window The Source window displays the source code that has been loaded in memory The source code may reside in the directory containing the object module or in any of the directories specified in the path To display the Source window 1 From the Windows menu choose Source The Source window indicates the current program counter PC and highlights the corresponding source line in red See Figure 12 6 source code line nu
310. tocom h int devn devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 sim docmd devn change pc 40 Change device 0 pc register to 40 Ef sim docmd devn break h P 80 Set a breakpoint for device 0 sim docmd devn go Begin execution of device 0 14 2 65 sim_gmcmd Get Command String from Macro File include simcom h include protocom h sim gmcmd device_index command_string int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command char command_string Pointer to return buffer for command line sim_gmcmd reads the next emulator command string from a macro file The sim_docmd function will normally determine that a command is a macro open the macro file and set the device structure sim_const in_macro flag The sim_gmcmd function returns the next line from the open macro file each time it is called It will clear the in_macro flag at the end of macro execution or if an invalid macro command is processed The command_st ring buffer should be at least 80 characters See Example 14 65 Example 14 65 sim gmcmd Execute the macro command file startup cmd on DSP device structure 0 include simcom h include protocom h include simusr h extern struct sim_const sv_const Emulator device structures char command_string 80 int devn devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Create new DSP structure sim
311. torola Library Functions 14 37 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 36 dsp_findmem Get map index for memory space P include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h int devn enum memory_map map int ok devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 ok dsp_findmem devn P amp map Get memory map index for P memory 14 2 37 dsp_findreg Get Peripheral and Register Index include simcom h include protocom h dsp_findreg device_index reg_name periph_number reg_number int device_index DSP device index to be affected by command char reg_name register name int periph_number return peripheral index int reg_number return register index dsp_findreg searches the dt_var periph structures for a match to the reg_name string provided in the function call If a match is found dsp_findreg returns the peripheral index through periph_number the register number through the reg_number parameter and 1 as the function return value otherwise it just returns 0 as the function return value You may also use the emulator help reg command to obtain a list of the valid periph_num and reg_num values and reg_val size for each register See Example 14 37 Example 14 37 dsp findreg Get peripheral
312. tus Determine DSP Status include driver h include simcom h int dspd_status device_index mode in in device_index DSP device affected by command mode address of buffer to receive device status dspd_status places the execution status of the target device device_index in the int pointed to by mode Valid values for mode are e DSP_USER_MODE device is executing a user program e DSP_DEBUG_MODE device is in debug mode The function returns TRUE on success or FALSE otherwise See Example 14 19 Motorola Library Functions 14 23 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 19 dspd_status determine status of DSP 0 include driver h include simcom h int devn status int device mode devn 0 dsp_new devn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 status dspd_status devn amp device_mode get device status 14 2 20 dspd write core _registers Write Core Registers to DSP Device include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int dspd_write core _registers device_index reg_num count value int device_index Index of DSP device affected by command int reg_num First once register to write unsigned long count Number of register words to write unsigned long value Pointer to area hold
313. uction contains no function call three question marks are shown to indicate that no function is recognized 1 From the Windows menu choose Calls The dialog box in Figure 8 4 appears level in the function label nesting address DvOD Calls 0 p 0x112 in loop 1 p 0x10a in Figure 8 4 Monitoring C Function Calls 2 Double click a stack level to select it as the expression context to evaluate expressions Each function call adds another stack frame each return removes one Entry 0 is the most nested function that is the top entry on the stack The highest number is the main function Each line of the Calls window shows e anumber to indicate the level to which the call is nested e the PC return address i e the address after the function call and e the name of the function The top level represents the call that first entered the debug monitor and so indicates the next instruction to be executed The call stack also indicates the context to use for evaluating C expressions As each function may have its own copy of a named variable it may be necessary to indicate which instance is required To use monitor C function calls from the command line see Section 13 23 FRAME Select C Function Call Stack Frame on page 13 29 and Section 13 52 WCALLS GUI C Calls Stack Window on page 13 54 8 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to ww
314. uctor Inc Chapter 8 Debugging C Source Code The Debugger provides several features that are specifically used in debugging C source code The following topics will help you understand how to best use the Debugger for debugging C source code Remember when you compile your source code to include debug information e Moving up and down the Call Stack e Displaying the Call Stack e Monitoring C Function Calls e Enabling Disabling IO Streams e Redirecting an IO Stream e Display the TYPE of a C variable or expression 8 1 Moving Up and Down the Call Stack 8 1 1 To Move Up the Call Stack You can move the current frame up and down the call stack 1 From the Modify menu choose Up The dialog box in Figure 8 1 appears Cancel Figure 8 1 Moving Up the Call Stack 2 Under Frames select the number of frames to move up in the stack 3 Click OK The frame to which you moved is now the current starting point for evaluations Motorola Debugging C Source Code 8 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Moving Up and Down the Call Stack 8 1 2 To Move Down The Call Stack 1 From the Modify menu choose Down The dialog box in Figure 8 2 appears Cancel Figure 8 2 Moving Down the Call Stack 2 Under Frames select the number of frames to move down the stack 3 Click OK The frame to which you moved is now the current starting point for evaluations To move
315. ues you can change the on chip bootstrap and data ROM areas The bootstrap ROM is specified by using PR as the memory space designator The data ROMs can be specified by XR or YR Loading an assembler output file can also modify the bootstrap ROM or data ROM areas The ROM areas can be reinitialized by selecting Reset from the Execute menu then selecting State For more information see Section 5 Managing Memory and Registers on page 5 1 Motorola Debugger and Device Configurations 7 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Setting the Default Device 7 2 Setting the Default Device You can specify any device to be the default device This of course is necessary when you are debugging a system that contains more than one device 7 2 1 To Set the Default Device 1 From the Modify menu choose Device then select Set Default The dialog box in Figure 7 2 appears Set Default Device Ed Device Figure 7 2 Setting the Default Device 2 Under Device select the number of the device that you want to be the default device also referred to as the current device 3 Click OK The default device is the device to which commands are applied When you change the default device the Session window and the Command window will automatically change to reflect the information for the new device However other windows such as the Assembly window Source window etc will not
316. up and down the call stack from the command line see Section 13 46 UP Move Up the C Function Call Stack on page 13 51 and Section 13 19 DOWN Move Down the C Function Call Stack on page 13 26 8 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Displaying the Call Stack 8 2 Displaying the Call Stack You can display the C function call stack beginning with the frame you specify 1 From the Display menu choose Call Stack The dialog box in Figure 8 3 appears Display Call Stack x Frames c f Innermost an aj C Dutermost 1 E Cancel Figure 8 3 Displaying the Call Stack 2 Under Frames select whether you want to display the innermost or outermost frames 3 Under Count specify the number of frames you want to display 4 Click OK If you are writing a script it can be useful to use the where command to display the C function call stack To use where from the command line see Section 13 54 WHERE GUI C Call Stack Window on page 13 54 Motorola Debugging C Source Code 8 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Monitoring C Function Calls 8 3 Monitoring C Function Calls You can monitor the calls that are made by C functions by displaying the Calls window The Calls window is updated as each instruction is executed If the instr
317. ures are allocated dynamically by calling the dsp_new function for each device The device type is also selected in the dsp_new function call In the display version of the emulator the device command handles the details of calling dsp_new The proper sequence of instructions necessary to allocate three DSP devices is shown below 14 68 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Multiple Device Emulation ads_startup 100 ADSP56000 dsp_startup dsp_new 0 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 dsp_new 1 56002 Allocate structure for device 1 a 56002 dsp_new 2 56002 Allocate structure for device 2 a 56002 14 5 2 Controlling Multiple DSP Devices Each target device operates independently under the control of the ADSDSP emulator The basic execution sequence for a single target device is unchanged Initialize DSP device Load memory initialize breakpoints as desired initiate execution dsp_go dsp_step etc If desired interrupt execution with dsp_reset or dsp_stop ON i ES call dsp_check_service_request to detect return to Debug Mode When controlling multiple devices all devices require initialization as above Whenever a device starts executing as a result of a command like step or a function call like d
318. uses when searching for an input file or object file assuming no path is explicitly specified with the filename Alternate directories are also searched in turn if an input file or object file are not found in the working directory 4 1 1 To Display the Current Paths 1 From the Display menu choose Path 2 Open the Session window if not already open The window in Figure 4 1 appears You will see the current working directory and the alternate source paths displayed Session window for device 03 Dy03 Session OF x A wsession path Device Working Directory C DSPtools software Win NT GUI563 BIN No Alternate Source Paths y Figure 4 1 Displaying Current Paths Motorola Object Files and Data Files 4 1 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc To Set the Working Directory Path Keep in mind that a separate directory path is maintained for each device This means that as you switch from one device to another the working directory also changes according to the current device The device number of the current device is indicated in the top left corner of the Session window For more information see section 2 2 Setting and Clearing the Path on page 2 2 and section 7 1 Setting the Default Device on page 7 3 To set or clear the path from the command line see section 13 34 PATH Define File Directory Path on page 13 42 4 2 To Set the Worki
319. vice returns to debug mode If it is not called the values returned by dsp_rreg may be unreliable The return value is TRUE on successful completion FALSE otherwise See Example 14 1 Motorola Library Functions 14 7 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions Example 14 1 ads cache registers cache registers include simcom h include protocom h int devn 0 int periphnum_pc regnum_pc unsigned long pc_value int status Find register reference numbers status dsp_findreg devn pc amp periphnum_pc amp regnum_pc status dsp_check_service_request devn Is device requesting service ckerr status if status Yes so tatus ads_cache_registers devn cache the registers get pc addr for service request tatus dsp_rreg devn periphnum_pc regnum_pc amp pc_value 0 0 14 2 2 ads_startup lInitialize ADS Database and Driver include simcom h include protocom h int ads_startup devp devtype char devp device driver name UNIX or board address PC int devtype Device family ads_startup initializes the device driver and allocates certain ADS data structures devp points to a character string containing the name of the device driver on UNIX systems or the
320. vice_index reset_type may be set to e DSP_JTAG_RESET_HARDWARE Force reset by asserting trst pin on JTAG port e DSP_JTAG_RESET_SOFTWARE Force reset by toggling tms pin on JTAG port until the JTAG TAP controller state machine returns to its reset state The function returns DSP_OK if the operation succeeds DSP_ERROR otherwise See Example 14 14 Example 14 14 dspd_jtag_reset reset JTAG communications with include simcom h include driver h int devn int status devn 0 dsp_new devn 96002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 96002 status dspd_jtag_reset devn DSP_JTAG_RESET_HARDWARE Motorola Library Functions 14 19 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 15 dspd_read_core_registers Read Core Registers from DSP Device include adsreg56 h include simcom h include driver h int dspd_read_core_registers device_index reg _num count value int device_index Index of DSP device affected by command int reg_num First register to read unsigned long count Number of registers to read unsigned long value Pointer to area to receive register values dspd_read_core_registers reads count core registers starting at register reg_nunm for target device device_index storing the values in the me
321. vn 56002 Allocate structure for device 0 a 56002 address 100L ok dsp_rmem devn memory_map_x address memval 14 48 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Library Function Descriptions 14 2 52 dsp_rmem_b1k Read Block of DSP Memory Locations include simcom h include protocom h include coreaddr h int dsp_rmem blk device_index memory_map address count return_value int device_index DSP device to be affected by command enum memory_map memory_map memory designator unsigned long address DSP memory address to read unsigned long count number of memory locations to read unsigned long return_value Returned memory value s dsp_rmem_b1k reads count locations starting at address from memory memory_map in device device_index and writes it to the memory block pointed to by return_value If memory_map implies a two word value the values are returned in order with the low order half of the first word followed by the high order half then the low order half of the second word For word n counting from 0 in the memory block the low order value is stored in return_value 2 n the high order value in return_value 2 n 1 The function return value indicates whether the memory locations exist It returns 1 if all the locations exist 0 otherwise The memory_
322. w freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Enabling Disabling lO Streams 8 4 Enabling Disabling lO Streams You can enable or disable stream I O for C programs that are running on the current device The standard stream files are supported STDIN STDOUT and STDERR Any references by C programs to these files may be redirected to files on the host Stream file handling may be configured independently for each device Streams handling is enabled by default If a C program attempts to access a stream file while it is not enabled and redirected the access is ignored Output is discarded and a standard value is supplied as input To enable or disable the 1 O stream 1 From the File menu choose IO Streams 2 Select Enable or Disable To enable or disable the I O stream from the command line see Section 13 40 STREAMS Enable Disable Handling of I O for C Programs on page 13 47 Motorola Debugging C Source Code 8 5 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Redirecting an I O Stream 8 5 Redirecting an I O Stream You can redirect an I O stream from the current device to a file on the host Each stream file can be assigned individually unwanted streams do not have to be redirected Streams can be redirected whether stream support is enabled or disabled however for the redirection to be effective stream operations must be enabled Disabling stream support while a stre
323. weommand help help pin command line help io di help gt 0 device number help line d asm break change copy device disassemble lt space gt more Figure 13 1 ADS Debugger Command Window In the Command window you will notice that several common commands are displayed on the help line The remaining commands can be displayed by pressing the SPACE bar when the cursor is at the beginning of the command line It is not necessary to type the complete command You only need to type the first one to three characters of the command for the Debugger to recognize the command The minimum number of required characters for each command is highlighted in red on the help line What is the complete syntax for a command You can display the complete syntax for a particular command by typing the command or the required characters on the command line and then pressing the SPACE bar The complete syntax of the command that you began typing is displayed on the help line Any text that follows a semicolon on the command line is considered a user comment You might use comments if you were logging output from the Session window or creating and running a Command Macro The command that you have typed in on the command line is executed when you press the ENTER key or the CARRIAGE RETURN key If the command is not a valid Debugger 13 4 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www fre
324. will not be renumbered For example if you have set breakpoints 1 2 and 3 and then clear breakpoint 2 the remaining breakpoints will be numbered 1 and 3 Notice that breakpoints are indicated in the Assembly window and the Source window if applicable Enabled breakpoints appear in blue Disabled breakpoints appear in pink For more information see section 2 6 Setting and Clearing Software Breakpoints section 3 10 Enabling and Disabling Breakpoints Chapter 10 Expressions and section 12 2 Display the Current Breakpoint The command reference line option for hardware breakpoints is covered in section 13 5 BREAK Set Modify or Clear Breakpoints in Chapter 13 Debugger Command Reference Motorola Controlling Execution 3 19 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Types of Hardware Breakpoints 3 9 Types of Hardware Breakpoints There are several types of hardware breakpoints that you can set The types that are available to you depend on the device on which you are debugging Table 3 5 through Table 3 10 provide detailed breakpoint information for each Suite56 device family supported the by the Suite56 debugger Table 3 5 DSP56000 Device Family Hardware Breakpoint Types Breakpoint Type Meaning pef break on any Program core fetch read only pcm break on Program read fetch or move read only pc m b
325. xample 13 50 WBREAKPOINT Command wbreakpoint Open a breakpoint window for the current device wbreakpoint dv0 3 4 Open a breakpoint window for the listed devices wbreakpoint off Close the breakpoint window for the current device Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 53 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc WCALLS GUI C Calls Stack Window 13 52 WCALLS GUI C Calls Stack Window WCALLS dev_list OFF WCALLS is a GUI command that opens a C call stack window Multiple device windows may be opened for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs Example 13 51 WCALLS Command wcalls Open a C call stack window for the current device wcalls off Close the C call stack window for the current device 13 53 WCOMMAND GUI Command Window WCOMMAND OFF WCOMMAND is a GUI command that opens the Command window Only one Command window may be opened even for debugging target systems with multiple DSPs The Command window is shared between all target DSP devices All commands affect the current default device unless specifically addressed to other device s The prompt on the command entry line indicates the current default device Example 13 52 WCOMMAND Command wcommand Open a Command window wcommand off Close the Command window 13 54 WHERE GUI C Call Stack Window WHERE dev_list n WHERE is a GUI command that displ
326. xecuted This provides a useful way to pause execution so that you can examine certain values or windows 3 12 1 To Pause Execution 1 From the Execute menu choose Wait 2 Select the number of seconds to pause or click on the checkbox marked Forever to pause indefinitely 3 Click OK 4 An information box appears to let you know that the Debugger is paused If you don t want to wait for the pause to end automatically you can resume program execution by clicking on Cancel Keep in mind that if you click cancel while recording a command macro that the cancellation of the pause is not recorded So for example if you specify a wait of ten seconds and then cancel after three when the command macro executes it will pause for the full ten seconds See section 9 1 Creating and Running a Command Macro on page 9 1 for more information about using macros with the Debugger To use wait from the command line see section 13 48 WAIT Wait Specified Time on page 13 51 3 24 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Allowing the Current Function to Finish 3 13 Allowing the Current Function to Finish Sometimes you will find that program execution has stopped while in the middle of executing a subroutine or function This might occur for several reasons It might occur because you specified that a certain number of steps be ex
327. y location as the starting address in the same memory space of a zero terminated ASCII character string The character string is written to the output file Example 6 3 Input Data Values to Memory 7FFF 7F3F 5D3C 7FC3 The untimed memory input file will cause the data sequence 7FFF 7F3F 5D3C 7FC3 to appear during consecutive reads of the specified memory location 1FF 0 The untimed memory input file will cause the data sequence 1 FF 0 to appear repeatedly during consecutive reads of the specified memory location Motorola Input and Output Files 6 3 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Assigning an Input File 6 1 4 Terminal Input of Data Values There are two levels of terminal data input provided by the Debugger If the input command specifies term as the input filename the Debugger opens an editor which allows creation of an input data file without leaving the Debugger The data file is given a temporary name termxxxx io or termxxxx tio Xxxx being a numeral between 0000 9999 and is saved on the disk at the termination of the input command The entire contents of the input file can be specified in this manner A second level of terminal data input allows you to be prompted any time the next input data value is needed This method is triggered if the lower case letter t is encountered in the data field of the input file This is only valid for the data field not for t
328. y paging control more off Disable Session display paging control reset or default state 13 32 NEXT Step Through Subroutine Calls or Macros NEXT dev_list count LI lines IN inst The NEXT command functions the same as the STEP command except that if the next instruction to be executed calls a subroutine or begins execution of a macro all the instructions of the subroutine or macro are executed before stopping to display the enabled registers In order to recognize macros the symbolic debug information for the program code must be loaded The debug information is included in the COFF format cld files generated using the Assembler s g option The optional count value enables repeating of the NEXT command the specified number of times before execution terminates All breakpoints are ignored while the NEXT command is executing Example 13 32 NEXT Command next Step over subroutine calls or macros or otherwise just advance one instruction and display the enabled registers and memory blocks next 10 Execute the equivalent of 10 NEXT instructions halting to display the enabled registers and memory blocks only after the tenth invocation next 10 li Step over the 10 next source lines if there is a source file associated with the current program counter Motorola Debugger Command Reference 13 39 For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc OUTPUT Assign
329. ya HH hi HHHHHH PASS AHH nieh ra pppbaa n Ma Figure 11 1 Go Button Go is also discussed in Section 3 1 Starting Execution with Go on page 3 1 and in Section 13 24 GO Execute DSP Program on page 13 29 11 2 Stop Button The Stop button stops program execution or if a command macro is running stops the macro See Figure 11 2 E inie lap ee Erico DMN Sawn yu Breall 2 p 000108 h devzb pr q198 cyr 244 xe HHHHHHHHHHHH ye HHHHHHHHHHHH a aggggagenppnnp b aappppppppppagd xIeSMMMHHM x H SHHHHHH ross HAHAHA SH gt MA TI LIT a2 ad at DDDDDD 39 aquaaa r5 DDDDAA ns 0 E NN LL SO y ta Evora rs Syo Figure 11 2 Stop Button Stop is also dicussed in Section 3 14 Stopping Program Execution on page 3 26 11 2 Suite56 ADS Debugger User s Manual Motorola For More Information On This Product Go to www freescale com Freescale Semiconductor Inc Step Button 11 3 Step Button The Step button executes the next instruction or line See Figure 11 3 yu Breall 2 p 000198 h dev b pr 9106 cyc 244 x HHHHHHHHHHHH y HHHHHHHHHHHH a aqgqgagenponnn b aqpppppppppnad xXI HHHHHH xHe HHHHHH HR SH SI A rast anata stint a2 Ma Speier y4 ig leuG 5 DER aS te Figure 11 3 Step Button If the Source window is open displaying the program source the Step button executes one line of code Otherwise the Step button executes one instruction On encounte
330. ype select the type of software breakpoint to set If you select al the breakpoint will always be acted upon Breakpoint types other than al are conditional and device specific See Table 3 2 Software Breakpoints DEBUGcc Available on the DSP56000 DSP56100 DSP56300 and DSP56600 on page 3 13 and Table 3 3 Software Breakpoints FDEBUGcc Available on the DSP96002 on page 3 15 for a list of software breakpoints 6 Under Address type the address where you want the breakpoint to be set For example to set a breakpoint at address 103 in p memory type p 103 Note This address must be the first word of an instruction Note If you have set the breakpoint type in step 5 to a conditional breakpoint that is any type other than al the breakpoint can only be set to an address which contains a nop Setting the breakpoint to an address which contains any other opcode will cause your program to execute incorrectly 7 Under Expression you can type an expression The expression will be evaluated when the address you specified is reached If the expression is true the breakpoint will be triggered If the expression is false no action is taken and program execution continues Be aware that a side effect of evaluating an expression whether it is true or false is that the program will not be executed in real time 8 Under Action select what action is taken when the breakpoint is encountered Table 2 1 Software Breakpoint Actions

Debugger User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents